JP7204579B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration presentation in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-051075 A

The operation means is provided at a position apart from the display means, for example, below the game area of the game machine. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the presentation by the display on the display means to check the state of the operation means, and it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the operation means is vibrating. In that case, the entertainment provided by the vibration presentation is insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to sufficiently enhance amusement by vibrating presentation by making the operator recognize the vibration of the operating means preferably by drawing attention to the operating means before the operating means vibrates. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means;
with
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration effect execution means is
The vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing,
Regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common manner,
The line-of-sight guidance effect execution means includes:
without executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing,
The visual guidance effect can be started before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing,
The vibration effect can be started while the visual guidance effect is being executed,
The vibration effect includes the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the vibration effect of the first mode,
When the visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode.
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is advantageous to the player). game state, etc.), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.). ), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and the player's line of sight A line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.) , and when the vibration performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the vibration performance is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 executes the vibration performance The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not performed, etc.), the vibration performance executing means has a first timing, a second timing after the first timing, , the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform any one of the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established, and the timing Vibration performance can be executed at either timing T3 during execution of ready-to-win performance of normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2 or timing T4 during execution of ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win. etc.), and regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, it is possible to execute the vibration production in a common manner (for example, the production control CPU 120 can control the timing T1 and the timing T2 or either timing T3 or timing T4, vibrating in a mode in which the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B are common. etc.), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2. fruit not to perform), the visual guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 and the timing T4). It is characterized by being able to execute a visual guidance effect before being displayed).

According to such a configuration, by drawing attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates, the vibration of the operation means can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above, the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect while the visual guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can (such as being able to execute a vibration effect when is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a reach effect of super reach and the like), and the vibration effect execution means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform super reach reach It may be possible to execute the vibration production while the production is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

(4) Display means for displaying in any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images, etc.), , the display of the visual guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the visual guidance effect effect image is always a small pattern or The priority is lower than the pending number display and various error notifications, and the priority is higher than the pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

(5) In the game machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the vibration performance executing means includes the vibration performance of the first mode and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state rather than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. Big win reliability is higher when the vibration performance of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and of making the push button 31B emit red light is executed than when the vibration performance of the mode of lighting white is executed. is high), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the line of sight When the guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. (e.g., it is easier to execute the vibration effect in which the light is emitted at the same time).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode by executing the visual guidance effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of an advance notice effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 208SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 208SG-4. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-5; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 208SG-7. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 027SH. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the game machine related to the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern of the gaming machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an advance notice effect; It is a production example of each advance notice production. It is a production example of each advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; It is an explanatory view explaining item image production. It is a display example of each item image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of item image effects and the like; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an advance notice effect; This is an example of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; It is an example of a display, such as a present box image. It is an example of a display, such as a present box image. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of a present box; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting suggesting effect (hot character effect, eye-catching effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of a hot character effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of an eye-catching effect; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing A for determining an advance notice effect and a present box effect. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process B for determining a setting suggestion effect (heated character effect, eye-catching effect); FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 006SH. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of vibration production|presentation, and an example of a big-hit reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production|presentation, and a visual guidance production|presentation, and a production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of execution determination of a visual guidance effect according to Modification 1; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the vibration production|presentation which concerns on the modification 2, and an example of a big-hit reliability.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".
(Description of Characteristic Portion 208SG)

Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-27.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is a left game area 208SG002L by operating the ball operating handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 208SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 208SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 208SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 208SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting-switching switch 208SG052, is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting-switching switch 208SG052 are housed in the board case 208SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the substrate case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 208SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. In the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 208SG201. In other words, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 208SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. be. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 208SG025A, second reservation display 208SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 208SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 208SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 208SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 208SG025A and the second suspension display 208SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 208SG025A and second pending display 208SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second LED from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 208SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 208SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and the second movable body 208SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 208SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random values independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, after once notifying that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 8-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-8 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-9 (C) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-10 (C) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is higher (this In the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

FIGS. 8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. No super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot variation pattern with resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), variation pattern judgment of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for loss is a variation pattern for loss of super reach α, a variation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and periodically according to the execution of software by the CPU 103 Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation storage number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation storage. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 208SGS505, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, when the second starting opening switch is not ON (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the starting prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS516), the start prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 208SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic part 208SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a judgment of whether or not to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 208SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 208SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and is in a short time state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. , and specify that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, if the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and the set value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2 and the game state is a variable If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and if the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 208SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined at 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (208SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), go to 208SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 208SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (208SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (208SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (208SGS532), and proceed to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature part 208SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this characteristic part 208SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit). and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the receive command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which the three patterns are "7" or "3" as the stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is a result designation command for the fifth variable table that indicates a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", or three consecutive even numbers (or (odd numbers) and other decorative patterns (small winning patterns) are determined. When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, at 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. It is an effect that can be executed in the period from the time to the timing of reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is a super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (208SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (208SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the jackpot type (208SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIGS. and prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the push button 31B operation acceptance period, or when the push button 31B operation acceptance period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the image display device 5 performs various effects. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x with a red effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS307), Go to 208SGS308. In addition, in the 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10%. determined by the ratio of In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 208SGS303, if the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko game machine 1. (208SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the cut-in effect start waiting timer times out, a cut-in effect process table corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316 determines the presence/absence of and effect pattern (208SGS3316), and executes the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is wrong in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is wrong. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), in 208SGS318, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55% based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Decide on a percentage. Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

If the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so that the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-21(C), the 208SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability high base state (208SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is a high probability high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. is determined (208SGS330). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (208SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high probability high base state Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (208SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability/high base state (208SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when it is the super reach δ variation pattern (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. 208SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-22, 208SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. FIG. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), whether or not a cut-in effect is to be executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, it is decided at a rate of 35% not to execute the cut-in effect. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22 and 8-24, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 when performing variable display with the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute resurrection performance - par reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, set value is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 when the reach effect of super reach γ is executed and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we focus on the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the fact that the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. This prevents the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which becomes indefinite.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for all set values, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3. setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability state. The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6, so that the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21(B) to 8-21(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 208SG, it is suggested that any of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve amusement in games.

8-21 and 8-22 are merely examples, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the game machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from the characteristic part 208SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3<Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 208SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a loss (208SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (208SGS363).

If execution of cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (208SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS367), and the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (208SGS368).

If the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 8-26(C) and 8-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern for displaying an image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. , and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a group image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed with YE-1, when the advance notice effect is executed with pattern YE-2, when the advance notice effect is executed with YE-3, and when the advance notice effect is executed with YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as a cut-in production pattern. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in the effect pattern with a high expectation of the big win, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result becoming a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern decided by one of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to give the notice. The effect determination process is ended (208SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (208SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

It should be noted that, when execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for the notice effect each time the variable display effect process is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern of loss, the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display from pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3 is executable. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effects in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the notice effect is performed in patterns YE-1 to YE-1 in the period before the reach. Pattern YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(A) to 8-30(E), when the execution of the notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the notice effect on the image display device 5 is the pattern YE-. 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2 , the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the group image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) to FIG. A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), when it comes time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player , prompting to operate the push button 31B is performed. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1,
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and a cut-in effect is performed. When the in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y with a golden effect, and when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 A cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , as a result of ready-to-reach effect (battle effect result) of super reach-gamma, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A), 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. Incidentally, the battle production as the reach production of super reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of super reach γ, but the fighting characters and the development of the battle may be partially different. may

As described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when the pattern CI-3 is executed. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is recognized as any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is any of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3 and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, and are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as pseudo-continuous effect in which temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols are repeatedly executed, may be used as long as the effect can be executed immediately.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect to be executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. For this reason, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is wrong, and the higher the setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since the player can be made to expect what is set, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game The rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate regardless of the set value set in machine 1. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 8-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the 1 big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the variation pattern in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result is a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, an example is provided in which variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect pattern YE-1 or YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it may have been a big win A or B, so the game interest in the variable display result losing. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big hit, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, so that the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, one of 4 to 6 is set as the set value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. The pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in a mode including the specific effect. If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted." A mode in which patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than in YE-2 is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, the cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern for not executing the resurrection effect is displayed. Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed in (PA2-4 or PB1-4) has been exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 8-33(A) to 8-33(E) as a modified example 208SG-1, when executing variable display with a variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set to the pachinko game machine 1 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that a variable display result is a big win despite the player recognizing that it has been set.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the form in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 208SG-2 is shown in FIG. As shown in -34 (A) to FIG. 8-34 (D), when executing the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. The ratio of performing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern. By doing so, for example, the player puts more importance on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. In the case where it is, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is notified of the loss, the resurrection effect is further executed and the result of the variable display is the big hit. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is notified, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3. As shown in 8-35 (A) to FIG. 8-35 (C), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a super reach γ jackpot for executing a resurrection effect. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variable display result is the jackpot, and is set in the pachinko game machine 1. After it is determined that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and it is once notified that the variable display result is lost during the reach performance of super reach γ during the variable display, the resurrection performance is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be announced as a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting that is set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the variable display result is lost By confirming that the value is one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. When the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and further the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to promote the continuation of the game against.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be a pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is performed. exemplifies a form in which the advance notice effect can be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is determined. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. and when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which super reach γ is lost, it is decided to execute the pattern CI-3, which is a production pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, as a cut-in production. In the case where the cut-in effect is a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the forewarning effect is performed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 is determined to be executed. It may be executable. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 By executing the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be wrong. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game will be a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. And when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high probability high base state, the game state is low if the set value is the same Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the probability low base state or the low probability high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification As shown in FIG. 8-37 as 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut at a higher rate than if the game state is a high-probability-high base state The in effect may be made executable in pattern CI-3.

By doing so, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state During the reach production of super reach γ Since the cut-in effect is likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, variable display of 1000 times) in the low-probability-low base state. When the willingness to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. is notified to the player, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). When the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same value, a cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Although the pattern CI-3 exemplifies a form that can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 208SG-6, as shown in FIG. When the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state , the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high probability high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, so the high probability Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big hit than the high base state, the game interest in these low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B) as a modification 208SG-7, during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of cut-in production, pachinko game A set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be made executable. In addition, in the case where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period before the set value suggestion effect (during the reach effect) (for example , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the ready state), the above-mentioned notice effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the set value suggesting effect may differ according to the effect pattern of the notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It suffices if the suggestive effect can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which production pattern the announcement effect is executed, and when the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting value suggesting effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect, the player can be prevented from overlooking the set value suggesting effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 208SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 027SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. The effect execution means can execute various effects (for example, various advance notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH of this embodiment. The pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH includes, for example, a movable body 027SH32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-1. Movable body 027SH32, according to the control of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. works in between. For example, the movable body 027SH32 operates in the order of 1st state→2nd state→1st state, or operates in the order of 1st state→2nd state→1st state→2nd state→1st state. → state between first state and second state (pause) → second state → first state, or first state → state between first state and second state (pause) → You may operate with the first state. It should be noted that the other configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 027SH is the same as the configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 208SG shown in FIG. is omitted.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature part 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 9-2(A) shows the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value (set value "1" to "6") when the gaming state is a low-probability state. FIG. 9-2(B) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set value "1" to "6") when the gaming state is a high probability state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH is different from the game state (whether it is a low-probability state or a high-probability state), and according to the setting value (setting value "1" to "6") 2, a plurality of types of special figure display result determination tables corresponding to each (respectively, a big hit determination value and a small 12 types of special figure display result determination tables to which hit determination values are assigned) are stored, for example, the CPU 103, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, determines the plurality of types of special figure display result determination Using one of the corresponding special figure display result determination tables out of the tables, it is possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or a small hit (whether it will be lost).

FIG. 9-2(C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 9-2(D) shows the distribution of the jackpot for the first special symbol. FIG. 9-2(E) shows the distribution of the big hits for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each includes A judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, a judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and a judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be distributed as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and (E). For example, the CPU 103 stores two types of jackpot type determination tables), and for example, in the winning random number value determination process, the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot will be made based on the special figure display result determination table. The type of jackpot (jackpot type) may be determined using a corresponding jackpot type determination table among the types of jackpot type determination tables.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram exemplifying the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 9-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing types of variation patterns (variation times). Variation pattern #10 is a non-reach variation pattern. Variation pattern #11 is a non-reach deviation (for shortening) variation pattern. Variation pattern #12 is a variation pattern of deviation from normal reach. Variation pattern #13 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and eventually loses. Variation pattern #14 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and eventually loses. Variation pattern #15 is a small hit variation pattern. Variation pattern #16 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot. Variation pattern #17 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Variation pattern #18 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 9-3(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. The degree of expectation (reliability) of a big hit is super reach B>super reach A>normal reach. The degree of expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability of execution of effect a when a big win occurs)*(probability of a big win)/{(probability of effect a being executed when a big win)*( Probability of hitting the jackpot) + (probability of executing the production a when not hitting the jackpot) x (probability of not hitting the jackpot)} Become).

For example, the reliability of super reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / {(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about 9.5%. In addition, the reliability of super reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0.3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about 10.2%.

In addition, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about 65.3%. In addition, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0.6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 9-3(B), the variation pattern #11 is not determined during the low base, but the variation pattern #11 is determined during the low base according to the number of reserved memories, for example. can be Further, according to the example of FIG. 9-3(B), the variation pattern #10 is not determined during the high base, but it seems that the variation pattern #10 is also determined during the high base according to the number of retained memories, for example. can be

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIGS. 9-5 and 9-6 are examples of respective advance notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 9-4. Note that, in this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect pattern.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH displays, for example, as shown in FIG. , a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH displays, for example, as shown in FIG. , to display a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a group notice effect (display of group images). The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 027SH displays a group image 027SHYKE-GN as shown in FIG. do.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-D” shown in FIG. 9-4 is the role advance notice effect (action of the character). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has the notice effect (movement of the character) of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D", for example, as shown in FIGS. Move the movable body 027SH32.

FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 9-7(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the super reach is lost (when it becomes either of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot In the case of (in the case of either variation pattern #17 or #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table for super reach loss, in which 40% of the total is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to execution, and 50% of the total is executed. A table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect for super ready-to-win big hits, which is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to yes, is stored. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, cut-in notice using the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table for the super reach jackpot. It may be determined whether or not to execute the production. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character object notice effect). In addition, if it does not become a super reach (if it becomes one of the fluctuation patterns #10, #11, #12, #15, #16), the execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute ).

When the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) relating to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of the decision ratio of the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7(B), when super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 20%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win jackpot, the notice performance pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice performance pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the feature part 027SH allocates 80% of the total as the determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and assigns 20% of the whole as the decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". A cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for super reach loss assigned as a judgment value, and 20% of the total is assigned as a decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " A super reach jackpot cut-in notice effect pattern determination table assigned as a determination value corresponding to YEP-A2" is stored, and for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines super reach when super reach is lost. Decide the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for losing, and cut in using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for the super reach big hit when it becomes a super reach jackpot. A notice effect pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the notice effect patterns of other notice effects (button notice effects).

FIG. 9-7(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the group announcement effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 50%. do. In addition, since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect (the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the effect. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

Fig. 9-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button announcement effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display). An example. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 50%. do. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH determines the announcement effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is determined to execute the button announcement effect. FIG. 9-7(E) is an example of determination ratios of the announcement effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is decided to execute the button announcement effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7(E), when super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 9-7(F) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object announcement effect (action of the character object). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 75%. do. Further, since there is only one type of notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern “YEP-D”) related to the character object notice effect, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH decides to execute the character object notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the character object notice effect. If super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

According to FIG. 9-7, in the case of super ready-to-win, up to four kinds of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability of executing the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image) when becoming a super reach is {(probability of losing × super reach when losing Probability of becoming × Probability of executing cut-in notice effect when super reach is lost) + (Probability of being a big hit × Probability of being super reach when big hit × Cut-in notice effect is executed when super reach is a big hit) Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when winning)}, in the case of a set value of 1, { (319/320 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42% .

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) is executed when super reach is {(probability of losing × probability of super reach when losing × group notice effect when super reach is lost) Probability of being executed) + (Probability of being a big hit x Probability of being a super reach when a big hit x Probability of performing a group notice effect when a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of being lost x when it is lost probability of becoming a super reach) + (probability of being a big hit x probability of being a super reach when a big hit)}, in the case of a setting value of 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1 /320*90%*50%)}/{(319/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 26%.

In addition, the probability of executing the button announcement effect (display button image → press → display weak cut-in image, or display button image → press → display strong cut-in image) when it becomes super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of super reach when losing x Probability of button notification effect being executed when missing) + (Probability of being a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting big x Super reach) Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of the big hit)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of getting super reach when losing) + (Probability of getting big x Probability of getting super reach at the time of big hit)} , for a set value of 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 10%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 ×90%)}=about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the role announcement effect (action of the role) is executed when super reach is {(probability of losing × probability of becoming super reach when losing × role when super reach is lost) Probability that the notice effect will be executed) + (Probability that it will be a big hit x Probability that it will be super reach when it is a big hit x Probability that the announcement effect will be executed when the super reach is a big hit)} / {(Probability that it will be lost x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (probability of being a big hit x probability of becoming super reach when being a big hit)}, in the case of setting value 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 5%) +(1/320*90%*75%)}/{(319/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 20%.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining item image effects. 9-9 are display examples of respective item images. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH can execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in FIG. 9-8(A).

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in Fig. 9-8(A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in preview effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) will be executed. This is the item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in preview effect).

In the item image effect A, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the cut-in notice effect is to be executed differs.

Specifically, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. FIG. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is blue.

The item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image A in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 9-9(B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is green.

The item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 9C is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. FIG. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is red.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. This is image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the group preview effect).

In the item image effect B, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the group announcement effect is to be executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B.

Specifically, the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image B in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV1 shown in FIG. 9D is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image B in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the group announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV2 shown in FIG. 9E is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image B in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027SHIGBLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(F) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of item image B. FIG.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. is an item image effect C that displays . In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the button preview effect).

In the item image effect C, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the button announcement effect will be executed differs.

Specifically, the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(G) is an example of the item image C in the first display mode (level 1).

The item image C in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image C in the second display mode suggests with medium reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 9H is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C. FIG.

The item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(I) is an example of the item image C in the third display mode (level 3).

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern “IGEP-D” shown in FIG. 9-8(A) displays an item image D suggesting that the role preview effect (YEP-D) will be executed. This is the item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the character object preview effect).

In the item image effect D, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the character object announcement effect is to be executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D.

Specifically, the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the first display mode indicates with low reliability whether or not the character product announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D. FIG.

The item image D in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a medium level of reliability whether or not the character object announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9(K) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D. FIG.

The item image D in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character object announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether or not the character product announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(L) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D. FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH has the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect B (IGEP-B), and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) shown in FIG. 9-8(A). , item image effects D (IGEP-D) of the four types of item image effects, there are cases where none of the four types are executed, and there are cases where only one type out of the four is executed, Two out of the four types may be executed, three out of the four types may be executed, and all four types may be executed.

Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image displayed in the item image effect. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can execute an item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). be. The same applies to the item image effect B, the item image effect C, and the item image effect D.

FIG. 9-8(B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image effect execution mode pattern is common to each item image effect (item image effect A, item image effect B, item image effect C, item image effect D). is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" shown in FIG. 9-8(B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern in which the item image effect is not executed. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" shown in FIG. 1) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that remains unchanged.

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" shown in FIG. 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" shown in FIG. 1) is changed to a second display mode (level 2), and the second display mode (level 2) is changed to a third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" shown in FIG. 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined for the item image effect B (IGEP-B). IGEGP1” is determined, item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined for item image effect C (IGEP-C), and item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” is determined for item image effect D (IGEP-D). If so, an item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and the display mode of the item image C is left unchanged in the first display mode (level 1), and the display mode of the item image D is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). (Item image effect B is not executed).

9-10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the determination ratio of the item image rendering. FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(A) shows item image effect execution of item image effect A (IGEP-A) when cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) are executed in Super Reach. It is an example of the determination ratio of the mode pattern. Fig. 9-10(B) shows the determination ratio of item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A (IGEP-A) when cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) are not executed in Super Reach. is an example.

FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(C) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed in Super Reach. is an example. FIG. 9-10(D) is an example of determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is not executed in super ready-to-win.

FIGS. 9-10(E) and 9-10(F) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(E) shows the item image effect execution mode of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when executing the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) in Super Reach. It is an example of a pattern determination ratio. Fig. 9-10 (F) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed in Super Reach. An example.

FIGS. 9-10 (G) and 9-10 (H) are an example of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (G) shows determination of item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect D (IGEP-D) in case of executing character product announcement effect (YEP-D) in Super Reach. This is an example of a ratio. FIG. 9-10(H) is an example of determination rate of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed in Super Reach. .

According to FIG. 9-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A suggesting the execution of the cut-in notice effect by displaying the item image A (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or whether the item The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or whether the item image effect B is executed The display mode of the item image B in the case) is determined by whether or not the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or whether the item image effect C is executed The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D suggesting the execution of the character product preview effect by displaying the item image D (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or whether the item image effect D is executed The display mode of the item image D in the case where the character is displayed) is determined by whether or not the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As a specific example, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. Explain the reliability of suggestions.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Cut-in Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image A)
According to FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3) in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4". is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display form of the item image A is the third display form in super reach is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the third display form Probability that item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image in the third display mode when cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach Probability that A is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (When the cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Item image A in the third display mode is finally displayed ) x (probability that the cut-in announcement effect will not be executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in super reach is the third display mode The reliability is (50%×42%)/{(50%×42%)+(10%×58%)}=about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 20%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of execution of the cut-in notice effect in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in super reach The reliability of the effect is (30%×42%)/{(30%×42%)+(20%×58%)}=about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 20% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 60%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in super reach The reliability of the effect is (20%×42%)/{(20%×42%)+(60%×58%)}=about 19%.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Button Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image C)
According to FIGS. 9-10(E) and 9-10(F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode (level 3) in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4". Or when "IGEGP5" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 70% in total (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed The item image rendering execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 5% (Fig. 9-10 (F)). The reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in super reach is, for example, (item in the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in super reach Probability that the image C is finally displayed)×(Probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {When the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed ) × (probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) x (probability that the button announcement effect is not executed in super reach)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Wear, the reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in Super-Reach. is (70%×19%)/{(70%×19%)+(5%×81%)}=about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined (Fig. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the second display mode. The reliability is (15%×19%)/{(15%×19%)+(10%×81%)}=about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 65%. An item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined (Fig. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the first display mode. The reliability is (10%×19%)/{(10%×19%)+(65%×81%)}=about 3.5%.

9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining display timings of various item images, execution timings of various advance notice effects, etc. in the variable display of super reach.

In FIGS. 9-11, T0 is the start timing during variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(A)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(D)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(G)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(J)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(B)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T6. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of item image effect A does not change at T6 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(E)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T7. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of item image effect B does not change at T7 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(H)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T8. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T8 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T9 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(K)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T9. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T8 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(C)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect A changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T10. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T11 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(F)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect B changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T11. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(I)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T12. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (it remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T13 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(L)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T13. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T14 is the timing for erasing the item image A (the timing for using it as an item). That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect A is executed. If the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T14 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is to be executed. T15 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T14 to T15 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T15 is also the timing for starting the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is the timing of ending the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). In other words, T15-T16 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2).

T17 is the timing for erasing the item image B. FIG. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect B is executed. If the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image B in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T17 is also the timing of starting the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T17-T18 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T18 is also the timing for starting the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T19 is the timing of ending the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). That is, T18-T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the item image C deletion timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect C is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T20 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T20 to T21 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T21 is also the timing to start executing the button announcement effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is the timing of ending the execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). That is, T21-T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2).

T23 is the item image D erasing timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect D is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image D in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T23 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character announcement effect (YEP-D). T24 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T23-T24 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

Further, T24 is also the timing for starting the performance of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D). T25 is the timing of ending the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). That is, T24 to T25 is the execution period of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D).

9-12 and 9-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 9-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect execution mode pattern " IGEGP4" (that is, item image effect B (IGEP-B), item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), etc.

In FIG. 9-12(A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 is a period during which the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 is a period during which the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15-T16 is the period during which the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1) is executed, that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5(A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), nothing is executed as the notice effect, and the item image effect is item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect C (IGEP-C), item image effect D (IGEP) -D) is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" (item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"), the item image A, It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing etc. of the item image C and the item image D. FIG.

In FIG. 9-12(B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Note that the cut-in forewarning effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. Note that the button announcement effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23-T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect. Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In Fig. 9-13 (A), cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), group notice effect (YEP-B), and button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as notice effects, and items are executed as item image effects. Image effect A (IGEP-A) and item image effect B (IGEP-B) are each executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. Display of item image A, item image B, item image C, and item image D when executed with "IGEGP4" and item image effect D (IGEP-D) is executed with item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of timing, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), group notice effect (YEP-B), and button notice effect (YEP-C1);

In FIG. 9-13(A), T14 to T15 are the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is deleted at T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T15-T16 is the period during which the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1) is executed, that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5(A)) is displayed. T17-T18 is the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect. The item image B is deleted at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T18-T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B), that is, the period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 9-5(C)) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. The item image C is deleted at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being deleted is the third display mode (level 3). T21 to T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6(A)) is displayed (when the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the push button 31B is operated, the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-6(B)) is displayed instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23-T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect. The item image D is deleted at T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being deleted is the first display mode (level 1). Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the notice effect, and only the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed as the item image effect. is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are item image effect 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image C, the execution timing of the role announcement effect (YEP-D), etc. in the effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”). FIG.

In FIG. 9-13(B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 is a period during which the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. T21-T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6(C)) is displayed (when the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the push button 31B is operated, the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 9-6(D)) is displayed instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T24-T25 is the execution period of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D), that is, the period during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 9-6(E) to 9-6(G)). In addition, in the example of FIG. 9-13(B), neither the display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character object preview effect is to be executed, nor the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not the character object preview effect is to be executed, is performed. An object announcement effect (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” is determined in the case where the role product announcement effect is executed (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), it is determined whether the role product announcement effect is to be executed. There is neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether the character object announcement effect is to be executed, so that the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

9-14 and 9-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIGS. 9-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIGS. 9-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution yes at a rate of 40% if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14) Then, if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either variation pattern #17, #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variation pattern is other than the above (variation pattern #10, #11, #12 , #15, or #16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the cut-in announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in notice effect (that is, notice effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and the notice effect pattern "YEP -A2" at 20%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in notice effect determined at step 027SHS102 (step 027 SHS 103).

Subsequent to step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when executing the cut-in announcement effect (step 027SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 0%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 20%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 50%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027 SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(B), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 60%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 10%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 20% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the variation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group announcement effect (step 027SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(C), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 0%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 20%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 45%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 5%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(D), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 60%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 10%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 10% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the variation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined to execute the button announcement effect (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button announcement effect (that is, the announcement effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and the notice effect pattern "YEP -C2" at 10%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") of the button notice effect determined at step 027SHS122 (step 027SHS123). ).

Subsequent to step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when executing the button announcement effect (step 027SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(E), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 5%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 10%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 60%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(F), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 65%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 5%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 5% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and execution is determined at a rate of 0% if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above.

Subsequent to step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the character product announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the performance of the character object announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS133. If it is not determined that the performance of the character product announcement is to be executed (step 027SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" for the character object notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Subsequent to step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character product announcement effect (step 027SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 5%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 60%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027 SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character product announcement effect is not executed (step 027 SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(H), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 74%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 4%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 2%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 9-16 to 9-20 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 027SH. Specifically, Figures 9-16 to 9-20 show examples of the main scenes in the example shown in Figure 9-12 (A). Figure 9-16 (A) → Figure 9-16 (B) → Figure 9-16 (C) → Figure 9-17 (A) → Figure 9-17 (B) → Figure 9-17 (C) → Figure 9-18 (A) → Figure 9- 18 (B) → Figure 9-18 (C) → Figure 9-19 (A) → Figure 9-19 (B) → Figure 9-19 (C) → Figure 9-20 (A) → Figure 9-20 ( B)→Transition in the order of FIG. 9-20(C).

FIG. 9-16(A) shows a scene of reach in the variable display. FIG. 9-16(B) shows a scene developed into super reach (scene of T1 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-16(C) is the scene at the beginning of the super ready-to-win effect (the scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-17 (A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9 -12 (A) just before T2). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is to be displayed immediately before the display timing of other item images such as the item image B or the like.

FIG. 9-17(B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A) T2 scene).

Regarding the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed and the item image A, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A is displayed. There may be a case where the item image A is displayed and a case where the item image A is not displayed. Further, the item image A may always be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed more easily when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed than when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are multiple types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It can be different. The relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed and the item image B, and the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed and the item image C , and the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI that suggests whether the item image D is to be displayed and the item image D.

FIG. 9-17(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (FIGS. 9-11 and This is the scene just before T6 in FIG. 9-12(A)). That is, immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A, the effect control CPU 120 performs an item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change. to run. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image will change immediately before the change timing of other item images such as the item image B.

FIG. 9-18(A) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

Regarding the relationship between the item image change suggestive display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change and the item image A, when the item image change suggestive display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the item image A There may be a case where the display mode changes and a case where the display mode of the item image A does not change. Further, the display mode of the item image A may always change when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of item image A changes depending on which type of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed is determined. Different ratios may be used. Item image change suggesting display 027 SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image B changes and item image B, Item image change suggesting display 027 SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image C changes and the item image C, and the relationship between the item image change suggesting display 027 SHIGD-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image D will change and the item image D are the same.

FIG. 9-18(B) shows an item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as in the scene of FIG. 9-17(C). is being performed (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). FIG. 9-18(C) is a scene (scene of T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the third display mode (level 3).

FIG. 9-19(A) shows that a fanning effect is executed (started) to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI. That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the stimulus effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the stimulus effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly indicates that each of the fanning effects will be executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effects that incite whether to execute other notice effects such as group notice effects. Display the start display of the stimulating effect.

Figures 9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B) show a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (Fig. 9-11 and scenes from T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-12(A)). In the example of FIGS. 9-19(B) to 9-20(B), the countdown display 027SHIGA-AO counts down until the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect to prompt whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an inciting effect to prompt whether or not to execute each of the advance notice effects immediately before the execution start timing of other notice effects such as the group notice effect.

FIG. 9-20(C) is a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scenes from T15 to T16 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

It should be noted that there is an inciting effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that an inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, will be executed, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, even if the fanning effect is executed and not executed when the fan effect start display 027 SHIGA-KAI is displayed. good. Also, when the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the hype effect may always be executed. In addition, there may be a case where the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. Further, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the fanning effect when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI, and depending on which type of the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the ratio of whether or not to execute the hype effect is made different. good too. A stirring effect start display 027 SHIGB-KAI indicating that a stirring effect is to be executed to incite whether or not to execute a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B, and a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B. button, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and the start display 027SHIGC-KAI indicating that the stimulus effect prompting whether to execute the button notice effect will be executed, and the item The relationship between the inciting effect inciting whether or not to execute the button foretelling effect, which is the foretelling effect corresponding to the image C, and the inciting effect for inciting whether to execute the character object foretelling effect, which is the foretelling effect corresponding to the item image D, is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the hype effect start display 027 SHIGD-KAI indicating that the item image D is to be played and the hype effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character announcement effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the inciting effect was executed. There may be cases where the cut-in notice effect is executed and cases where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (see FIG. 9-12(B)). Also, when the fanning effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect may always be executed. Also, the cut-in announcement effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. Also, the cut-in notice effect may be executed more easily when the fan effect is executed than when the fan effect is not executed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of fanning effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may differ depending on which type of fanning effects has been executed. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the notice effect corresponding to the item image C. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect as the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and to incite whether to execute the role announcement effect as the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character object preview effect that is the preview effect corresponding to the item image D.

FIGS. 9-21 to 9-30 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 027SH. Specifically, Figures 9-21 to 9-30 show examples of major scenes in the example shown in Figure 9-13 (A), and Figure 9-21 (A) → Figure 9-21 (B) → Figure 9-21 (C) → Figure 9-22 (A) → Figure 9-22 (B) → Figure 9-22 (C) → Figure 9-23 (A) → Figure 9- 23 (B) → Figure 9-23 (C) →, …, Figure 9-29 (A) → Figure 9-29 (B) → Figure 9-29 (C) → Figure 9-30 (A) → Figure 9 −30(B)→FIG. 9-30(C).

Figure 9-21 (A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (T2 in Figure 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-21(B) is a scene (T2 scene in FIG. 9-11) where execution of item image effect A has started (that is, display of item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) has started). is.

FIG. 9-21(C) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGB-SHI that suggests whether item image B is displayed (T3 in FIG. 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-22(A) is a scene (T3 scene in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). is.

FIG. 9-22(B) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGC-SHI that suggests whether item image C is displayed (T4 in FIG. 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-22(C) is a scene (T4 scene in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image rendering C is started (that is, display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). is.

Figure 9-23 (A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGD-SHI that suggests whether item image D is displayed (T5 in Figure 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-23(B) is a scene (scene of T5 in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image effect D has started (that is, display of the item image 027 SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) has started). is.

FIG. 9-23(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect is performed using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (Fig. 9-11 The scene just before T6). FIG. 9-24(A) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-24(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGB-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image B will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T7). FIG. 9-24(C) is a scene (scene of T7 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image rendering B has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25(A) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect is performed using an item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGC-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image C will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T8). FIG. 9-25(B) is a scene (scene of T8 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image D will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T9). FIG. 9-26(A) is a scene (scene of T9 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D does not change.

FIG. 9-26(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image D will change (see FIG. 9-11 This is the scene just before T13). FIG. 9-26(C) is a scene (scene of T13 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D does not change. Note that the item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene (scene of T12 in FIG. 9-11) before the scene of 9-26(C).

FIG. 9-27(A) shows that a fanning effect is executed (started) to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI.

FIG. 9-27(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A) scene from T14 to T15). FIG. 9-27(C) is a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scenes from T15 to T16 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

Fig. 9-28(A) shows the start effect start display 027SHIGB indicating that the effect effect to incite whether or not to execute the group effect effect (YEP-B), which is the effect effect corresponding to the item image B, is to be executed (started). - This is the scene displaying KAI (the scene just before T17 in Figures 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-28(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGB-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 ( This is the scene from T17 to T18 in A). FIG. 9-28(C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is being performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 027SHYKE-GN is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9 -13 (A) T18-T19 scene).

FIG. 9-29(A) is an inciting effect indicating that an inciting effect is to be executed (started) to incite whether to execute the button intensive effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), which is the intensive effect corresponding to the item image C. This is the scene where the production start display 027SHIGC-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T20 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-29(B) shows a scene in which the hype effect 027 SHIGC-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 ( This is the scene from T20 to T21 in A). FIGS. 9-29(C) to 9-30(A) are scenes in which the button announcement effect (YEP-C1), which is the announcement effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed. 9-11 and 9-13(A) where a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the push button 31B is operated (scenes T21 to T22 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-30(B) is a start effect start display indicating that a start effect prompting whether or not to execute the character object notice effect (YEP-D), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image D, will be executed (started). This is the scene displaying 027SHIGD-KAI (the scene just before T23 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-30(C) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGD-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A) scene from T23 to T24). It should be noted that the character object announcement effect, which is the announcement effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed after the fanning effect (see FIG. 9-13(A)).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 9-16 to 9-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) that suggests display of each item image is common. However, it may be different for each item image. In addition, each of the inciting effects (027SHIGA-AO, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) that fuels each notice effect is common, but is different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). good too. The fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each of the notice effects is common, but the fanning effect of any of the notice effects is displayed. It may be different depending on where it starts (ie for each item image).

(Suggest setting value)
Next, suggestions for set values (see FIGS. 9-2(A) and 9-2(B)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH suggests the currently set setting value using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has a fourth display mode ( A display mode of level 4) may be provided to suggest the setting value currently set in relation to displaying the item image D in the fourth display mode.

(first example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(C), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed (movable body 027SH32 is operated). In addition, (regardless of the result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the set value currently set is high (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(D), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) → miss, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (no movement of the movable body 027SH32). It may be possible to suggest that the currently set value is high (for example, a value of 4 or more) (regardless of whether it is a hit or miss).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (F), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → failure, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Fifth example)
Also, although illustration is omitted, when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → disappears (regardless of whether or not the character announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed), the currently set A high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the set value.
(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (the second to fourth examples may also be the same), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). Alternatively, it may be displayed by changing from another display mode), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed from the beginning (T5 in FIG. 9-11), as shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" in FIG. 9-32(A). may In addition, in FIG. 9-32(A), the fourth display mode is a gold color that generally makes the player recognize that the win is confirmed or high. When the possibility of becoming is not zero (for example, in the case of the second example), the fourth display mode may be a color or a pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as a determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the role announcement effect (YEP-D), FIG. 9-10 ( G), instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect D (IGEP-D ), instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-10(H), the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-32(C) may be used as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. In other words, when executing the process of step 027 SHS134 in FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines the item image effect execution mode pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32(C).

In other words, there is no transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the non-execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32(C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode There is a case where there is a transition from the display of D to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)), and the item image in the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current setting value is any of the setting values 1 to 3. If the current set value is one of set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), display of the item image D in the fourth display mode→execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) occurs when the setting value is 1-3. setting value 4-6 is more frequent than In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), compared to the case of low setting (eg, set value of 3 or less), the fourth The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the transition (or the frequent transition) from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) means that the setting value currently set is high. This suggests that the setting is (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), even if it becomes super reach A (variation pattern # 13, # 17), even if it becomes super reach B (variation pattern # 14, # 18) Even if there is, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" can be determined when the character effect is executed (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%, If the setting value is any one of 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%), but only when the character effect is executed in the case of super reach B, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be determined (the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” may not be determined when the character object effect is executed in the case of super reach A). In other words, in the case of Super Reach B, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32). On the other hand, in the case of super reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32). may be set so that there is no setting difference.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32) → big hit. However, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) to the disconnection. You may make it so that there is For example, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the role product effect is executed is set to the common setting value 1 to 6 (eg, 20%), while the super reach is lost. The decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the role product effect is executed may be different between the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 4 to 6 (for example, It may be set to 1% when the setting value is any one of 1 to 3, and 10% when the setting value is any one of 4 to 6).

In addition, in the case of super reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (movement of the movable body 027SH32) → miss While there is a setting difference, in the case of super reach A, display of item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of movable body 027SH32) → failure , there may be no setting difference.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). For example, the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” may be different between the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 4 to 6 (for example, if the setting values are any of the setting values 1 to 3, the ratio is set to 0.5). 5%, or 3% if the set value is any of 4 to 6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → the big hit, Display of the item image D in the fourth display mode→non-execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D)→off may be set differently. For example, in the super reach jackpot (fluctuation patterns #17, #18), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character object effect is not executed is set to a common setting value of 1 to 6 (for example, 5%). , When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined when the character object effect is not executed when the super reach is lost (fluctuation patterns #13, #14), when the setting values are 1 to 3 and when the setting values are 4 to 6 (for example, 0.5% for set values 1 to 3, and 3% for set values 4 to 6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, although the details are omitted, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the big hit, but the item image in the fourth display mode There may be a setting difference in the transition from display of D to failure.

In the above description, an example of suggesting that the currently set setting value is set to a high value (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, negation of the lowest setting (set value 1) (set value 2 or more) may be suggested, or set values 1 to 6 may be suggested. In other words, in the above description, an example was explained in which setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6 are divided into two and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is different. to 6, and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern may be changed, or the setting values 1 to 6 are each divided into six, and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is set. can be different.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 027SH)
Next, modified examples in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-32 will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of execution start timing of each advance notice effect corresponding to each item image have been explained. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display start timing of item images A to D is as follows: display start timing of item image A (T2)→display start timing of item image B (T3)→item image The display start timing of C (T4)→the display start timing of item image D (T5) is in that order, and the execution start timing of each of the advance notice effects corresponding to item images A to D is the cut-in corresponding to item image A. Execution start timing of announcement effect (T15)→Execution start timing of group announcement effect corresponding to item image B (T18)→Execution start timing of button announcement effect corresponding to item image C (T21)→Corresponding to item image D This is the order of the performance start timing (T24) of the character object announcement effect, and the order of the display start timing of each item image does not match the order of the execution start timing of each announcement effect corresponding to each item image. ing. However, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images do not have to match. For example, the items may be displayed in order of item image A→item image B, and may be executed in order of group announcement effect corresponding to item image B→cut-in announcement effect corresponding to item image A. Also, when item image A→item image B are displayed in order, there are cases where cut-in notice effect → group notice effect are executed in order, and group notice effect → cut-in notice effect in order. You may do so.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is individually different has been described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, item image A is T1, item image B is T2, item image C is T3, and item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different. For example, the display start timing of two of the four item images A to D may be the same, or the display start timing of three of the four item images may be the same. Alternatively, all four types of item images may be displayed at the same timing.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is individually different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, item image A is T6, item image B is T7, item image C is T8, and item image D is T9. However, the timing at which each item image changes to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different. For example, two of the four item images A to D may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time, or three of the four item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time, or all four types of item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. The same applies to the change timing to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display mode when the item image A starts to be displayed is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode when the display is opened is the second display mode (level 1). 2) or the third display mode (level 3). Item image B, item image C, and item image D are the same. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the time of display opening may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the advance notice effects are executed example), which is earlier than the For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, none of the item images change at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, the item image display start timing is earlier than any notice effect is executed) example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the execution periods of one notice effect and another notice effect do not overlap, but the execution periods of one notice effect and another notice effect may overlap. In other words, the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → the execution start timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → other There may be a case where execution start timing of advance notice effect→execution end timing of certain advance notice effect→execution end timing of other advance notice effect.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice effect are one-on-one, such as item image A and cut-in notice effect, item image B and group notice effect, item image C and button notice effect, item image D and role notice effect. An example of correspondence has been described. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, what can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item) is the cut-in notice effect, and the item image B being deleted. A group foretelling effect can be executed based on this, a button foretelling effect can be executed based on the deletion of the item image C, and a button notice effect can be executed based on the deletion of the item image D. explained that it was a role preview production. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

For example, one item image (eg, item image X) may be associated with a plurality of announcement effects (eg, cut-in announcement effect, group announcement effect). When item image X is associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased, and item image X is executed. There are cases where only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasing of . Note that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image Y is deleted. A cut-in notice effect may be executed based on this. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, the rate at which the notice effect is executed may be varied according to the type of the item image to be deleted. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of item image X and item image Y when they are deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed depending on whether item image X or item image Y is deleted. different percentages may be used.

Also, for example, a plurality of item images (eg, item image X, item image Y) may be associated with a plurality of notice effects (eg, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect). When item image X and item image Y are associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased. , the case where only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, the case where only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and the case where the item image Y is In some cases, only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasure. Note that when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the deletion of the item image X, or when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are performed based on the deletion of the item image Y. may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, depending on the type of item image to be deleted, the rate at which the notice effect is executed and the rate at which the notice effect is executed may be changed. good.

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the corresponding advance notice effect at the time of display start, but the item image may not be able to specify the corresponding notice effect at the time of display start. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, solid color) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. may be changed from an unidentifiable display mode (for example, plain) to a display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) in which the corresponding advance notice effect can be specified.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which multiple item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but multiple item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A in the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) may be displayed side by side. When N item images of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed a maximum of N times.

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Although the display mode of the item image changes in the above, the type of the item image does not change, but the type of the item image may also change. For example, when the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image B in the first display mode (level 1), or when the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) changes to the second display mode (level 1). There may be a case where the display mode (level 2) of the item image B is changed. Note that when the type changes, such as when the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B in the second display mode (level 2), the display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, there are four types of advance notice effects and four types of item images corresponding to the advance notice effects, but the number of item images and notice effects does not have to be four. For example, in relation to Modification 8 described above, there may be two types of item images and five types of advance notice effects, or five types of item images and two types of notice effects. Also, one type of item image and one type of advance notice effect may be used.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example is explained in which the timing of erasing an item image is the timing of execution of an inciting effect that agitates the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing of erasing the item image may be the timing of executing the announcement effect corresponding to the item image. That is, the item image may continue to be displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect, and may be erased when the performance of the notice effect starts (when the fanning effect ends). Specifically, in FIGS. 9-11, item image A is erased at T15 instead of T14, item image B is erased at T18 instead of T17, item image C is erased at T21 instead of T20, The item image D may be erased at T24 instead of T23.

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fan effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11), and during the execution period of the fan effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-11) and during the period of the cut-in notice effect ( T15 to T16 in Figure 9-11) is not displayed (in the case of Modification 13 described above, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and during the cut-in notice effect period (T15 in Figure 9-11 An example of not displaying in T15 to T16) has been explained. In other words, the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest, and is not displayed during the period of the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect period without being erased. In other words, the item image A may not be deleted even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In relation to Modified Example 14 described above, if the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 3)), at the start of the inciting effect that incites the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the inciting effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "Inciting effect is in progress" ”, etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the stimulating effect execution mode → notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , at the end of the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect execution mode → the notice effect end mode (for example, a mode in which the color is grayed-down or monochrome, and the word "done" is displayed). In other words, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15), it is set to the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16), it is set to the "notice effect execution mode", and cut After the end of the in advance notice effect (from T16), the "end notice effect mode" may be set. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

In addition, if the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fan effect, at the timing of starting the execution of the cut-in notice effect, the fan effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the word "notice It is also possible to adopt a mode in which "effect not executed" or the like is displayed). That is, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14-T15), it may be set to the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and after the end of the fanning effect (T15-), it may be set to the "non-notification effect execution mode". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

The manner in which the fanning effect is executed may be common regardless of the type of item image. For example, it may be displayed in a plain color, with the words "inviting", or the like. The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

Note that, instead of the above, the mode of execution of the fanning effect may correspond to the type of the item image. For example, the colors may be grayed down, or the words "inviting" may be displayed within the range where the pattern (see FIG. 9-9) corresponding to the type of item image can be recognized. The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before the execution of the notice effect) was explained, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (notice effect It is not necessary to perform the inciting effect before the execution of ). That is, after the item image is used, the notice effect may be executed without executing the fan effect.

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image effect (item image display) and the notice effect are executed during the super ready-to-win effect, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed during other periods. For example, the flow may be: start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → erase item image A → execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display of item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect. The flow may be: start of variable display→ready→start of display of item image A→development to super reach→erasure of item image A→execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed over a plurality of changes.

For example, during one fluctuation, all the necessary item images (item images decided to be displayed) are displayed, and after the next fluctuation, all the displayed item images are erased. It is also possible to execute all of the advance notice effects (the notice effects determined to be executed). For example, display of item image A, item image B, and item image C is started at the first variation → during the variation after some variation (for example, during any variation of the second to fourth variation), the item image A, The flow is such that the item images B and C are all erased (each item image can be changed between display start and disappearance) and the required advance notice effect is executed.

Also, for example, during a certain variation, all necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are displayed, and over a plurality of variations, the item images being displayed are sequentially erased to produce the required advance notice ( It is also possible to sequentially execute the advance notice effect determined to be executed. For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed in the first variation, and the item image A is deleted in the first variation (the item image A can be changed between the display start and the deletion). Execute the notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Delete the item image B at the 2nd change (Item image B can change between display start and disappear) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3 changes Item image C is erased (item image C can be changed between display start and disappearance) and the necessary notice effect (button notice effect) is executed. , start displaying item image C → erase item image A in the second change (item image A can change between display start and disappear) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → in the third change Delete item image B (item image B can be changed from display start to deletion) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C starts display to It is possible to change between erasing) and execute the necessary notice effect (button notice effect).

Also, for example, over a plurality of fluctuations, the necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed, and during another fluctuation after all the necessary item images have been displayed, the item being displayed All of the images may be erased and all the necessary notice effects (the notice effects decided to be executed) may be executed. For example, the display of item image A is started in the first variation → the display of item image B is started in the second variation → the display of item image C is started in the third variation, and the item image A, the item image B, and the item are displayed in the third variation. The flow of deleting all image C (each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) and executing the necessary notice effect, or the item image A starting to be displayed in the first change → the item image in the second change Start displaying B → Start displaying item image C at the 3rd change → Delete all item images A, B, and C at the 4th change (Each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) It is a flow of executing the required announcement effect.

In addition, for example, the required item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the item images being displayed are sequentially erased over a plurality of fluctuations to obtain the necessary advance notice. Effects (announcement effects whose execution has been determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, display of item image A is started in the first variation → item image B is displayed in the second variation, and item image A is deleted in the second variation (item image A can be changed between display start and deletion). Execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect), and at the 3rd change, erase item image B (item image B can change between display start and erase) and perform the necessary notice effect (group notice effect). The flow of execution, for example, the item image A is displayed in the first variation → the item image B is displayed in the second variation → the item image A is deleted in the third variation (the item image A is displayed between the start and deletion changeable) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect), and at the 4th change, erase the item image B (item image B can change between display start and erase) and perform the necessary notice effect (group It is a flow of executing the advance notice effect).

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7 and 9-14), but the item image is determined in the advance notice setting process (step S161). good too. In the aspect in which the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the item image is determined based on whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the variation pattern (see FIGS. 9-10). When determining the item image in the setting process (step S161), based on the contents of the received pattern designation command (see FIG. 8-16) and variation category designation command (see FIG. 8-16), the item image may decide. In addition, a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. . That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variation may be associated with one item image.

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, after the item image is displayed, as an effect when using the item image, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used was explained, but the notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used There may be cases where a different type of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being erased, but the group notice effect is executed based on the item image A being erased. may be executed. In addition, as an example related to modification 8, when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with one item image (for example, item image X) , based on the deletion of the item image X, there is a case where a notice effect (for example, a character notice effect, etc.) different from the plurality of notice effects (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a group notice effect) is executed. may As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used may be executed, a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used is executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win may be higher than in the case where the announcement effect corresponding to the type of item image used is executed.

(Modification 21 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Suggestion of set values has been described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, but the suggestion of set values is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to Modification 1 described above, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images are determined at the ratio of determining whether or not to match. A setting difference may be provided, and a setting value may be suggested in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), and is set to high (for example, 4). or more), it is set to 85%, and the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the notice effect do not match (or the frequency of mismatch) is high (for example, the set value 4 or more). In other words, the rule regarding the above order (in principle, the order is the same) is broken more frequently with high setting (5% with low setting, 15% with high setting), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) causes high setting. You may suggest.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timing of a plurality of item images is simultaneous, and the display start timing of a plurality of item images is related to whether the display start timing is simultaneous. and may suggest a set value. As an example, the percentage of simultaneous display start timings for multiple item images is set to 5% for low settings (e.g., 3 or less) and 15% for high settings (e.g., 4 or more). , matching of the change timings of a plurality of item images (or matching frequently) may indicate a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the rule regarding the display start timing (in principle, not at the same time) is broken more frequently with high setting (5% with low setting, 15% with high setting), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) A setting may be suggested. Similarly, in relation to Modification 3 described above, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous is determined. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 4, setting differences are provided in the determination ratio of the display mode when the item image is displayed, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode when the item image is displayed. good too. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set to a low setting (for example, 3 or less), 3%, high setting (e.g., 4 or more), 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). (Alternatively, the high frequency of the second display mode (level 2)) may suggest a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or higher). In other words, the frequency with which the rule regarding the display mode when the item image is displayed (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is broken is higher with the high setting (3% with the low setting, 9% with the high setting), A high setting may be suggested by rule breaking (the frequency of rule breaking).

Also, the setting value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of strong cut-in images, the setting values may be suggested in the strong cut-in images. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) that displays a strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image ” is determined at a rate of 95% and “special strong cut-in image” at a rate of 5%. "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) that displays the strong cut-in image, the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the frequency of displaying the "special strong cut-in image" is A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested.

Also, for example, for group images (FIG. 9-5(C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared. A setting value may be suggested in the group images by providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of . Specifically, for example, after it is decided to execute the group announcement effect (YEP-B), if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), the "normal group image" is 95%, and the "special group image" is 95%. ” is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the setting is high (e.g., 4 or more), 80% of the “normal group image” and 20% of the “special group image” are determined. good. In other words, in the group preview effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group images, the display of the "special group images" (or the frequent display of the "special group images") is a high setting. (For example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested.

Moreover, in super reach, you may make it suggest a setting value. For example, for super reach B (variation patterns #16 and #18), there are two types of super reach effects: a normal super reach effect (battle effect in background 1, etc.) and a special super reach effect (battle effect, etc. in background 2). , and by providing a set difference in the determination rate of the type of super reach performance of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach performance of super reach B. Also, it may suggest a set value in relation to the jackpot. For example, two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big win game state of the third big win (see FIG. 9-2), and the fanfare effect in the third big win is prepared. A set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big win by providing a set difference in the determination ratio of the type of .

Also, the item image may indicate that the setting value will be suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect The item image A may be displayed in a manner suggesting that the setting is performed (for example, in a manner in which the text "Advance notice with setting suggestion?" etc. is displayed). In other words, for the item image A in the above mode, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the cut-in notice effect will be a special strong cut-in image " is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed in a mode in which the text "Advance notice with setting suggestion!" In other words, the item image A in the above mode suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

Note that the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4 are different effects, etc. (may be effects related to the reliability of the big hit, or may be effects not related to the reliability of the big hit). The item image may indicate that the suggestion is made.

In addition, it is also possible to suggest that the setting value will be suggested later by means other than the item image. In other words, the item image may not suggest that setting values will be suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fan effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect may be performed (for example, a mode in which a wording such as "Advance notice with setting suggestion?" is displayed in the vicinity of the countdown number) may be executed. In other words, in the above-described mode of fanning effect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, a "special strong cut-in image" will be displayed in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, it is possible to execute a stimulating effect such as a mode in which words such as "notice with setting suggestions!" are displayed near the countdown numbers. In other words, the above-described mode of fanning effect suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

It should be noted that it is also possible not to suggest at all that the setting value will be suggested later. In other words, the setting value may be suggested without any advance suggestion (without suggesting the item image or without suggesting anything other than the item image.

It should be noted that "suggestion of set value" only makes the user recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range), and that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). may not be definitely reported, and a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range) may be definitely reported. For example, for a certain effect or a certain display, etc., by not deciding when it is a low setting (for example, set value 3 or less), the effect or display etc. can be set at high setting (for example, set value 4 or less) It will definitely notify you of something.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not in an advantageous state), periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), it is determined whether to transition to another state (for example, an advantageous state) than normal. In a slot machine that draws lots with a high probability, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice performances with different expectations of transition to another state in a high probability period that periodically visits, and from the high probability period In the previous period, it was possible to display an item image that can specify the type of notice effect to be executed, and after the item image was displayed according to the display mode of the item image, the type specified by the item image You may make it the ratio which an announcement production|presentation is performed differs.

Alternatively, in a slot machine that draws with a high probability whether a first advantageous state (e.g., CZ, bonus game, etc.) transitions to a second advantageous state (e.g., AT state, ART state, etc.), the first During the second period of the advantageous state (for example, the period from the latter half to the final stage of the period of the first advantageous state), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different expectations of whether the transition to the second advantageous state will occur. In addition, in the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, it is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed, and the item image is displayed according to the display mode. After the item image is displayed, the rate at which the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed may be different.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 027SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) is provided with an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means is , within a predetermined period (for example, T15-T16, T18-T19, T21-T22, T24-T25 shown in FIG. 9-11, the period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.). Effect (for example, multiple types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4) can be executed, and a specific display (for example, FIG. 9-9 (A) to A specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), etc.) that displays a plurality of types of item images shown in (L)) before the predetermined period can be executed, and the Depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within a predetermined period, the rate at which content advantageous to the player is notified differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. different), there are times when the forewarning effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed and when it is not executed (for example, FIGS. 9-10 (A) and (C) (E) When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image is determined when executing the notice effect of (G), the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display item images when the advance notice effects of FIGS. 9-10 (B) (D) (F) (H) are not executed. ' is determined, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed), and there are a plurality of display modes for the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9(A) to ( L)), the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIG. 9-8 (B), FIG. 9 As shown in -10 (A) to (H), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the effect is executed is as follows: the display mode of the item image corresponding to the previous notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)>the display mode of the item image corresponding to the previous notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)> the forecast The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notification effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above gaming machine, since the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display, Increased interest in gaming.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above-described means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). possible (for example, item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T15)), and the special mode of the specific display is independent of the type of the specific display. (for example, common regardless of the type of item image).

According to the gaming machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (that the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the foretelling effect being executed and which specific display is the specific display corresponding to the foretelling effect being executed.

(Means 3 related to characteristic part 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 and 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A may be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T16)).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (that the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific displays can be displayed within a specific period before the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 9-11) A maximum of four types of item images can be displayed at T14, etc.), and each type of specific display may be displayed in any display mode (for example, in the scene of FIG. 9-26 (C), the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and item image D is displayed. displayed by the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, interest is enhanced.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, T24) Furthermore, the notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the notice effect varies depending on the type of the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, the cut-in notice effect execution start timing is T15, execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, execution start timing of the character object notice effect is T24, and so on. The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode varies depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is the cut-in notice effect At the time of execution (T15), it is possible to change to the "notice effect execution mode", and at the time of execution of the group notice effect (T18), the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode", and the item image C is a button notice. When the performance is executed (T21), the item image D can be changed to the "forecast effect execution mode" when the performance is executed (T24). The timing at which the image becomes the "preview effect execution mode" may vary depending on the type of the previous effect specified by the item image.

According to the gaming machine described above, since the execution timing of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, it is possible to reduce the complication of the effect.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 to 5 above displays the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect before execution of the one notice effect, and the notice effect before the execution of the one notice effect. (For example, in the example of FIG. 9-13(B), the item image B corresponding to the button notice effect is displayed before the button notice effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character product announcement effect is not displayed before the performance of the character product announcement effect is performed), and the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is displayed before the one announcement effect is performed. The rate at which content advantageous to the player is announced differs between when the announcement effect is displayed and when the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is not displayed before the execution of the one announcement effect. B), as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, and when the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed Since the execution ratio of the notice effect is different from when the corresponding item image is not displayed, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed. 9-7(A) to 9-7(F) may be different from when the item image corresponding to is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the flow of the presentation, interest is enhanced.

(Means 7 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display (For example, an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as shown in FIG. 9-17(C), etc.) may

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, interest is improved.

(Means 8 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of identification information, and prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch by the effect control CPU 120) that prefetches and judges whether content advantageous to the player is notified An advance notice setting process (step S161, etc.) may be provided, the predetermined period may be a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the prefetch determination. For example, one variable display may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variable display may be associated with one item image.

According to the gaming machine described above, the degree of interest in the variation to be executed later increases, and the interest increases.

(Means 9 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. It is possible to set one of the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the forewarning effects of the plurality of types. You may For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of strong cut-in images, the setting values may be suggested in the strong cut-in images.

According to the gaming machine, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, attention is also paid to whether the set value is suggested in the notice effect displayed after the specific display is displayed, so interest is improved. .

(Means 10 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is also paid to the specific display regarding the indication of the set value, so interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the set value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, the item image effect may suggest execution of the setting suggesting effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect, interest is enhanced.

(Means 11 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the preceding notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggesting effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest. If the item image effect of displaying an item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect is associated with the setting suggestion effect of suggesting the setting value, the effect becomes complicated and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered instead. However, in the above game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggesting effect, and the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect are independent from each other, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 12 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, an item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest setting values.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is also paid to the specific display regarding the indication of the set value, so interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the set value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, since the item image effect is also a setting suggesting effect, interest is improved.

(Means 13 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed. may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the performance mode (for example, background) of the super ready-to-win performance, or the set value may be suggested by the start performance (fanfare performance) of the jackpot game state.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest. If the notice effect and item image effect are associated with the setting suggesting effect, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. Because it is independent from the , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 027SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 006SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 006SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 006SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various advance notice effects, present notice effects, setting suggestion effects, etc., which will be described later).

The front view and the like of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 006SH are the same as those of the pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH (see FIG. 9-2). However, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 027SH32 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 027SH is referred to as the movable body 006SH32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 006SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2(A). . The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2(B). . Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH may be provided with a small hit in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH. will be described assuming that no small win is provided.

The type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 006SH is the same as the type of jackpot (jackpot type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 associated with the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-2(C). . Also, the sorting of the jackpot types of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH is the same as the sorting of the jackpot types of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and (E).

The content of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH is the pachinko related to the characteristic part 027SH shown in FIG. The content of the variation pattern of the game machine 1 is the same as that of the game machine 1 . The determination ratio of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH is the pachinko related to the characteristic part 027SH shown in FIG. It is the same as the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIG. 10-2 is an example of the advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 006SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 10-1. Note that, in this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect pattern.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH uses the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (characteristic for convenience of explanation) as shown in FIG. A weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in the explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the part 006SH. Note that when the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to be described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the notice effect pattern "YEP-A".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 006SH uses the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (feature A strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed in the explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the part 006SH.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 10-1 is the group notice effect (display of group images) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH has the group image 027SHYKE-GN (for convenience of explanation, the characteristic part In the description of the pachinko game machine 1 related to 006SH, the group image 006SHYKE-GN) is displayed.

The announcement effect of the announcement effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the button announcement effect (button image display→pressing→weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH has the button image 027SHYKE-BU (for convenience of explanation) as shown in FIGS. , the button image 006SHYKE-BU in the description of the pachinko machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 006SH) and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI) are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect. Note that when the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" to be described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the notice effect pattern "YEP-C".

The announcement effect of the announcement effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 10-1 is the button announcement effect (button image display→pressing→strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 9-4. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH has the button image 027SHYKE-BU (button image 006SHYKE) as shown in FIGS. -BU) and strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The announcement effect of the announcement effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 10-1 is the character object announcement effect (character action) shown in FIG. 9-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 006SH has the movable body 027SH32 (movable body 006SH32) is operated.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-E” shown in FIG. 10-1 is a pseudo consecutive notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH executes, for example, pseudo-continuous notice effects as shown in FIGS. . In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-2(A), (B), and (C), after the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is stopped (temporarily stopped) as a middle symbol (symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C), , Re-variable display of the middle pattern is performed.

10-2(D), (E), and (F) relate to other advance notice effects (advancement notice effects), which will be described later in detail. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH is capable of executing the notice effect of the notice effect patterns "YEP-A" to "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 10-1 as the notice effect. described as.

FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the decision ratio of the advance notice effect. FIG. 10-3(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), if the normal reach is missed (variation pattern # 12), the execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the super reach is missed (variation pattern If either #13 or #14), execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and if it becomes a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 30%. , In the case of a super reach jackpot (in the case of either variation pattern #17 or #18), execution is determined at a rate of 30%. It should be noted that if the reach does not occur (if the variation pattern #10 or #11 occurs), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed). It should be noted that the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in announcement effect is common to set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of other advance notice effects.

When the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 006SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 10-3(B) shows an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-3(B), when the normal reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 100%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 0%. determined by the ratio of When the super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a normal reach jackpot, the notice performance pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the notice performance pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 50%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice performance pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice performance pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. Note that the decision ratio of the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determined proportions of the notice effect patterns of other notice effects.

FIG. 10-3(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the group announcement effect (display of the group image). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect (the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”), the pachinko machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect, performs the group notice effect. The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the relevant notice effect pattern.

Fig. 10-3(D) shows the determination ratio of execution or non-execution of the button announcement effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display). An example. FIG. 10-3(E) is an example of determination ratios of the announcement effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is decided to execute the button announcement effect.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object announcement effect (action of the character object). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern (the notice effect pattern “YEP-D”) related to the role notice effect, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 006SH decides to execute the role notice effect, the character The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the notice effect.

FIG. 10-4(B) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect. Since there is only one type of notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern “YEP-E”) related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 006SH, when it is determined to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-E" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the notice effect.

FIGS. 9-5 and 9-6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the present box presentation and the like. In the present box presentation, after displaying an unopened present box image (for example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL in FIG. 10-5(A)), an open present box image (for example, in FIG. 10-5(B)) is displayed. This is an effect of displaying the present box image 006SHPB-OP) (that is, opening the present box). In this embodiment, when the present box is opened (when the opened present box image is displayed), one of the announcement effects shown in FIG. 10-3(E) is executed. There are multiple types of present box presentation patterns for the present box presentation depending on the type of presentation presentation that is executed when the present box is opened (that is, which presentation presentation presentation is to be executed can be specified by the present box presentation pattern. is). Since FIGS. 10-5(C) to 10-5(J) relate to other examples, the details will be described later.

The present box effect pattern “PBP-A” is a present box effect in which a cut-in announcement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-6(A). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6(A), when the gift box is opened, the item image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9(A), etc.) Item images A of machine 1 without "level" display, etc.) are displayed, and a cut-in notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern “PBP-B” is a present box effect in which a group announcement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-6(B). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6(B), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the group announcement effect (for example, the pachinko machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9(D) etc. 1 item image B without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the group announcement effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern “PBP-C” is a present box effect in which a button announcement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-6(C). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the button announcement effect (for example, the pachinko machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (G) etc. 1 item image C without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the button announcement effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern “PBP-D” is a present box effect in which a role announcement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-6(D). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6(D), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the character object announcement effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the characteristic portion 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9(J) etc. Item images D of machine 1 without "level" display, etc.) are displayed, and the character object announcement effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern “PBP-E” is a present box effect in which a pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-6(E). In the example shown in FIG. 10-6(E), when the present box is opened, an item image corresponding to the pseudo consecutive notice effect (for example, the item image displaying "again") is displayed, and the pseudo consecutive notice effect is displayed. executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10-6(A) to 10-6(E), an unopened present box image (present box image 006SHPB-CL) and an open present box The image (present box image 006SHPB-OP) is common regardless of the present box rendering pattern. In other words, the player does not know which announcement effect will be executed before the present box is opened in the present box effect.

FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the present box effect. Fig. 10-7(A) shows a present box presentation (present box presentation pattern "PBP-A") targeted for the execution of the cut-in notice presentation (YEP-A) when the cut-in notice presentation (YEP-A) is executed. is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the According to FIG. 10-7(A), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 15%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 90%. If the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed present box effect (PBP-A) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. At that time, a big hit is more likely to occur than when the present box performance (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in foretelling performance (YEP-A) is not executed before the cut-in foretelling performance (YEP-A) is executed. That is, for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(A), in most cases (85%), cut-in notice effects ( YEP-A) is executed, whereas in the case of a big hit, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed along with present box effect (PBP-A) in most cases (90%). Therefore, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A), it is better to cut without the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A). A big win is more likely to occur than when the in-notice effect (YEP-A) is executed.

Fig. 10-7(B) shows whether or not to execute the present box effect (present box effect pattern "PBP-B") targeted for execution of the group forewarning effect (YEP-B) when the group forewarning effect (YEP-B) is to be executed. This is an example of a ratio. According to FIG. 10-7(B), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 90%. If the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is not executed, Present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(B), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) When the present box effect (PBP-B) corresponding to the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed, the group notice effect (YEP-B) is supported before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. A big hit is more likely to occur than when the present box presentation (PBP-B) is not executed.

Fig. 10-7(C) determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (present box effect pattern "PBP-C") for the execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C). This is an example of a ratio. According to FIG. 10-7(C), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 60%. In addition, if the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, Present box effect (PBP-C) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(C), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C) When the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed, the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed before the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. A big win is more likely to occur than when the corresponding present box presentation (PBP-C) is not executed.

Fig. 10-7(D) shows whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern "PBP-D") is executed for the performance of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) when the character object announcement effect is executed. is an example of the determination ratio of According to FIG. 10-7(D), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 80%. In addition, if the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed present box effect (PBP-D) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(D), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), the performance of the character object notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. When the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to the character object preview effect (YEP-D) is executed before the character object effect effect (YEP-D) is executed, the character object effect effect (YEP-D) is executed. -D) is more likely to result in a big hit than when the present box presentation (PBP-D) corresponding to PBP-D) is not executed.

Fig. 10-7(E) shows whether or not a present box effect (present box effect pattern "PBP-E") is executed for execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E). is an example of the determination ratio of According to FIG. 10-7(E), if the result is a loss, the execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the hit is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined. ) is executed at a rate of 60%. If the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed, the presence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 0%. present box effect (PBP-E) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 10-7(E), similar to the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) When the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed, the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) -E) is more likely to result in a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the item (PBP-E) is not executed.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 006SH can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-ATU" shown in Fig. 10-8(A) displays, for example, a thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU as shown in Fig. 10-8(B). It is a hot character production. As will be described with reference to FIG. 10-9, the hot character effect suggests a set value when losing, but does not suggest a set value when a big win.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern “SEP-EYE1” shown in FIG. This is a normal eye-catching production that displays EYE1. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 shown in FIG. 10-8(C), the yukata of the character is plain. As will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-10, the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (in the case of either variation pattern #13 or #14), and the special eye-catching effect (described later) is executed. not, but suggests a set value.

The setting suggesting effect of the setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-EYE2" shown in FIG. This is a special eye-catching production that displays EYE2. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 shown in FIG. 10-8(D), the yukata of the character has a goldfish pattern. As will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-10, the special eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (when either variation pattern #13 or #14 occurs) to suggest a set value. When SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect) and SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect) are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as SEP-EYE (eye-catching effect).

Note that the eye-catching images (eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2) are images that are displayed when the effect background during reach is switched to the normal background (non-reach background).

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the hot character effect (set-suggesting effect pattern “SEP-ATU”). FIG. 10-9(A) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the hot character effect when the set value is 1-5. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), if normal reach is missed (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 1%, and if super reach A is missed (variation In the case of pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and when super reach B is missed (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, normal reach In the case of a big hit (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%. If it becomes a super reach B jackpot (if it becomes a variation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. It should be noted that if the reach does not occur (if the variation pattern #10 or #11 occurs), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

FIG. 10-9(B) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the hot character effect (set-suggesting effect pattern “SEP-ATU”) when the set value is 6. In FIG. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), if normal reach is missed (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and if super reach A is missed (variation If pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if super reach B is missed (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, normal reach In the case of a big hit (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%. If it becomes a super reach B jackpot (if it becomes a variation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. It should be noted that if the reach does not occur (if the variation pattern #10 or #11 occurs), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

According to FIGS. 10-9 (A) and 10-9 (B), the hot character effect is a effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (a effect with a relatively small percentage of determination of execution in the case of losing). be. More specifically, the expectation of a hot character effect when the set value is 1 to 5 is higher than the expectation of a hot character effect when the set value is 6 (the hot character in the case of losing) The determination ratio of whether or not the effect is executed is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6).

When the set value is 1 to 5, the determination ratio of execution of the hot character effect in the case of failure is lower than when the set value is 6 (that is, when the set value is 6 is higher than when the set value is 1 to 5), the frequency that the hot character effect is executed and is lost is higher when the set value is 1 to 5 when the set value is 6. It is higher than when it is 5 (specifically, when focusing on the same kind of reach, when the setting value is 6, it is 5 times higher than when the setting value is 1 to 5). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6, depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the result is lost. For example, the player has executed a hot character effect and developed into a super reach, but the frequency of losing as a result is usually (usually the set value is one of 1 to 5 ), it becomes possible to guess that the set value is 6.

On the other hand, since the determination ratio of execution of the hot character effect in the case of a big hit does not change between when the set value is 1 to 5 and when the set value is 6, the hot character effect is executed, and , the frequency of hitting the jackpot does not change when the set value is 1 to 5 or when the set value is 6. Therefore, the player cannot guess whether the set value is 1 to 5 or 6, depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the jackpot is won.

In other words, as described above, the hot character effect suggests a set value in the case of a loss, but does not suggest a set value in the case of a big hit.

FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of an eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect). FIG. 10-10(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of an eye-catching effect. The determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the eye-catching effect is common to set values 1 to 6 (does not depend on the set value). According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), if super reach A is missed (if variation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 100%, and if super reach B is missed Also (in the case of variation pattern #14), execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In cases other than the above (in the case of one of the fluctuation patterns #10 to #12 and #16 to #18), execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed). In other words, as described above, the eye-catching effects (normal eye-catching effects, special eye-catching effects) are executed when the super reach is lost (when one of the fluctuation patterns #13 and #14 occurs).

When the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 006SH decides to execute the eye-catching effect, it determines setting suggesting effect patterns ("SEP-EYE1", "SEP-EYE2") relating to the eye-catching effect. Fig. 10-10(B) shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion effect pattern ("SEP-EYE1", "SEP-EYE2") when it is decided to execute the eye-catching effect when the setting value is 1 to 3. is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), when the super reach A is lost, the normal eye-catching production (setting suggestion production pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the special eye The catch effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 10%, and if super reach B is missed, the normal eye-catching effect (set suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is 95%. , and a special eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 5%.

Fig. 10-10(C) shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestive effect pattern ("SEP-EYE1", "SEP-EYE2") when it is decided to execute the eye-catching effect when the set value is 4 to 6. is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), when the super reach A is lost, the normal eye-catching production (set suggestion production pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is determined at a rate of 60%, and the special eye The catch effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 40%, and if super reach B is missed, the normal eye-catching effect (set suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE1”) is 60%. , and the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE2”) is determined at a rate of 40%.

The decision ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when super reach A is lost is higher when the set value is 4 to 6, when the set value is 1 to 3 , the super reach A is lost, and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, it is four times higher when the set value is 4-6 than when the set value is 1-3). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach A is lost and the special eye-catching effect is executed. . For example, if the player loses Super Reach A and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3). If it is felt, it becomes possible to infer that the setpoint is 4-6.

The determination ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when super reach B is lost is higher when the set value is 4 to 6, and when the set value is 1 to 3 , the super reach B is lost, and the frequency of execution of the special eye-catching effect is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, when the set value is 4-6, it is 8 times higher than when the set value is 1-3). Therefore, the player can guess whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, depending on the frequency with which the super reach B is lost and the special eye-catching effect is executed. . For example, if the player loses the super reach B and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3). If it is felt, it becomes possible to infer that the setpoint is 4-6.

Note that the difference in the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed depending on whether the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 results in a failure of super reach A, and the special eye-catching effect is executed. Since the super reach B is lost and the case where the special eye-catching effect is executed is larger than the case (the difference is 4 times in the former, and the difference is 8 times in the latter), the player will lose the super reach A. , and based on the frequency of execution of the special eye-catching performance with super reach B falling off, rather than the frequency of execution of the special eye-catching performance, it is easier to have confidence in estimating the set value by oneself. It's becoming As an example, considering the case where there were two changes in total that resulted in super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both times were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1 to 3 1% (10% × 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in a deviation), whereas the rate of change developed into super reach B and resulted in deviation. Considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations and two special eye-catching effects, this case is 0.25% (5% x 5%) when the set value is 1 to 3. The denominator is super reach. (In other words, there were a total of two changes that developed into Super Reach A and resulted in a loss), and both times were special eyeballs. The set value is 1 to 3 in the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach B and ended up being missed, and both times were special eye-catching effects, compared to the case where the catch effect was used. Because it is easy to deny that it is), the set value estimation ( It is easier to have confidence in the assumption that the set value is 4-6 instead of 1-3.

Since the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the special eye-catching effect is not executed when the super reach is out (see FIGS. 10-10 (B) and (C)), the normal eye-catching effect is not executed when the super reach is out. , is synonymous with non-execution of a special eye-catching effect at the end of super reach. Therefore, the set value is also suggested by the normal eye-catching effect, though not as much as by the special eye-catching effect. As an example, considering the case where there were two changes in total that resulted in super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both were normal eye-catching effects, the set values are 1 to 3 in this case. Occurs at a rate of 81% (90% x 90%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that develop into super reach A and results in deviation), and 36% when the set value is 4 to 6 (60% × 60%.Since the denominator is the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in deviation), even if the set value is estimated, it seems to be a relatively uncertain estimation. On the other hand, considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach A and ended up being missed, and both times were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1 to 3. 1% (10% × 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in deviation), and 24% when the set value is 4 to 6 (40% × 40%.Since the denominator is the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and resulted in deviations), even if it is estimated that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3, it is still relatively small. seems like a reasonable guess. In other words, there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into super reach A and resulted in a loss, and both times the change developed to super reach A and resulted in a loss compared to the case where the normal eye-catching effect was used. It is easier to estimate the set value in the case where there are two fluctuations in total and two special eye-catching presentations.

10-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 10-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings of various effects and the like in the variable display of super reach.

In FIGS. 10-11, T0 is the start timing during variable display. T1 is the timing at which the present box image (the unopened present box image 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A)) is displayed when the present box effect is executed. At T1, when executing a plurality of present box effects corresponding to the plurality of advance notice effects, a plurality of present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. For example, a present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and a present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) -B), two present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-A) for the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A) is executed. In other words, T3 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5(B). It's time to let

T4 is the timing to start executing the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A). T5 is the timing of ending the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A). That is, T4 to T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A).

T6 is the opening timing of one present box image in the case where the present box effect (PBP-B) targeted for execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed. In other words, T6 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5(B). It's time to let

T7 is the timing to start executing the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T8 is the timing of ending the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). That is, T7 to T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the opening timing of one present box image in the case where the present box effect (PBP-E) is executed for the execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E). In other words, T9 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5(B). It's time to let

T10 is the timing of starting the execution of the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E). T13 is the timing of ending the execution of the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E). That is, T10 to T13 is the execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E).

T11 is the timing to start execution of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). T12 is the timing to end execution of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). That is, T11 to T12 is the execution period of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-C) targeted for execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. In other words, T15 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5(B). It's time to let

T16 is the timing to start executing the button announcement effect (YEP-C). T17 is the timing of ending the execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C). That is, T17-T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C).

T18 is the opening timing of one present box image in the case where the present box effect (PBP-D) targeted for the performance of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed. In other words, T18 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 10-5(A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 10-5(B). It's time to let

T19 is the timing for starting the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). T20 is the timing of ending the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). That is, T19 to T20 is the execution period of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D).

Ta21-Ta22 is a lost symbol stop display period in the case of losing. Ta22-Ta23 is the execution period of the eye-catching effect. Tb21 to Tb23 are a jackpot symbol stop display period in the case of a jackpot.

10-12 to 10-14 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 10-12 (A), the variation pattern is normal reach out (variation pattern # 12), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed, and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed. Various timings are shown when the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed. It should be noted that setting suggestion effects (heated character effects, eye-catching effects) are not executed.

In FIG. 10-12(A), T1 is the timing at which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. That is, at T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) intended for execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-A) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1).

In FIG. 10-12(B), the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the pseudo continuous notice effect (YEP-E). ) is executed, and the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) and the present box effect (PBP- E) is executed, and various timings are shown when the hot character effect (SEP-ATU) is executed.

In FIG. 10-12(B), T1 is the timing at which two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. In other words, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) intended for the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the execution of the simulated consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) were targeted. A present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2). That is, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is executed without the present box effect (PBP-A) (without changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP). be.

T6 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-B) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7-T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character presentation (SEP-ATU).

In FIG. 10-13, the variation pattern is super reach B loss (variation pattern # 14), the button announcement effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the button announcement effect (YEP A present box effect (PBP-C) for the execution of -C1) and a present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and a hot character effect ( SEP-ATU) and special eye-catching effects (SEP-EYE2) are shown.

In FIGS. 10-13, T1 is the timing at which two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. In other words, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) intended for the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1), and the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect (YEP-E) were targeted. A present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-C) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17-T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1). Ta21 to Ta22 is a lost symbol stop display period. Ta22-Ta23 is the execution period of the special eye-catching effect.

Fig. 10-14 shows that the variation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern #18), and includes a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C2). A role announcement effect (YEP-D) and a pseudo continuous announcement effect (YEP-E) are executed, and a present box effect (PBP-A) and a group announcement are targeted for the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2). Present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of effect (YEP-B) and present box effect (PBP-C) and character announcement effect (YEP) for execution of button notice effect (YEP-C2) -D) for the execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) and the pseudo continuous notice effect (YEP-E) for the execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect ( SEP-ATU) are shown at various timings.

In FIG. 10-14, T1 is the timing at which five present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. In other words, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) intended for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) and the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) were targeted. Present box image 006SHPB-CL for present box effect (PBP-B), Present box image 006SHPB-CL for present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of button notice effect (YEP-C2), Character object notice effect Present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-D) for execution of (YEP-D), present box effect (PBP-E) for execution of simulated consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. T2 is a reach timing.

T3 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-A) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4-T5 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2).

T6 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-B) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7-T8 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10-T13 is the execution period of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). T11-T12 is the execution period of the hot character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-C) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17-T18 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C2).

T19 is the timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box presentation (PBP-D) displayed at T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. A period from T19 to T20 is a period during which the character product announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed. Tb21-Tb22 is a jackpot symbol stop display period.

(Production decision processing A (determination of advance notice production and gift box production)
10-15 to 10-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process A executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-16 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIGS. 10-15. The flowcharts of FIGS. 10-17 are continuations of the flowcharts of FIGS. 10-16.

In the effect determination process A shown in FIGS. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach out (either variation pattern # 10 or # 11) However, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13, # 14), execution is possible is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17, # 18 ), then execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 006SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in notice effect (that is, notice effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), if the variation pattern is out of normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 100%, and determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 100%. A2" is determined at 0%. If the variation pattern is out of super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 20%. Further, if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 50%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 006SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in notice effect determined at step 006SHS102 (step 006 SHS 103).

Following step 006SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (step 006SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) at a rate of 15% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern. , if the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) has been determined (step 006SHS105). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) should be executed (step 006SHS105; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS106. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) should be executed (step 006SHS105; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS105 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-A" (step 006SHS106).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute group announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11) However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible is determined at a rate of 30%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17, # 18 ), then execution is determined at a rate of 50%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS111). If it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS113. If it is not determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 in FIG. 10-16.

Following step 006SHS111 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group notice effect (step 006SHS113).

Subsequent to step 006SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-B) targeting the execution of the group announcement effect, based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) at a rate of 25% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern. , if the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-B) has been determined (step 006SHS115). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) should be executed (step 006SHS115; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS116. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) should be executed (step 006SHS115; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 in FIG. 10-16.

Following step 006SHS115 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-B" (step 006SHS116).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106 in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button announcement effect based on the variation pattern (FIG. 10-16 step 006 SHS 120). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11) However, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17, # 18 ), then execution is determined at a rate of 50%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS121). If it is determined that the button announcement effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS122. If it is not determined to execute the button announcement effect (step 006SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button announcement effect (that is, the announcement effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (E), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and the notice effect pattern "YEP -C2" at 10%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 006SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern of the button notice effect determined in step 006SHS122 (the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") (step 006SHS123). ).

Subsequent to step 006SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-C) targeting the execution of the button advance notice effect, based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(C), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) at a rate of 10% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern. , if the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS124, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-C) has been determined (step 006SHS125). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) should be executed (step 006SHS125; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS126. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) should be executed (step 006SHS125; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS125 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-C" (step 006SHS126).

Following step 006SHS121 (NO), step 006SHS125 (NO), or step 006SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (either variation pattern # 10 or # 11) However, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18) ), then execution is determined at a rate of 75%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the character product announcement effect should be executed (step 006SHS131). If it is determined that the performance of the character product announcement is to be executed (step 006SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS133. If it is not determined that the performance of the character product announcement is to be executed (step 006SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 in FIG. 10-17.

Following step 006SHS131 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-C" for the character object notice effect (step 006SHS133).

Subsequent to step 006SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-D) targeting execution of the character product announcement effect (step 006SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(D), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) at a rate of 5% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern. , if the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 80%.

Following step 006SHS134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) has been determined (step 006SHS135). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) should be executed (step 006SHS135; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS136. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) should be executed (step 006SHS135; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 in FIG. 10-17.

Following step 006SHS135 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-D" (step 006SHS136).

Following step 006SHS131 (NO), step 006SHS135 (NO), or step 006SHS136 in FIG. 17 step 006 SHS 140). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 0% if the variation pattern is non-reach deviation (any of the variation patterns # 10 and # 11) However, if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17, # 18 ), then execution is determined at a rate of 60%.

Subsequent to step 006SHS140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect should be executed (step 006SHS141). If it is determined that the pseudo consecutive notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS143. If it is not determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006 SHS141; NO), this flow chart ends.

Following step 006SHS141 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-E" for the pseudo consecutive notice effect (step 006SHS143).

Subsequent to step 006SHS143, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-E) targeting the execution of the simulated consecutive advance notice effect (step 006SHS144). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(E), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) at a rate of 25% if the variation pattern is a deviation pattern. , if the variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, execution of the present box presentation (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS144, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the present box effect (PBP-E) has been determined (step 006SHS145). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) should be executed (step 006SHS145; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS146. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) should be executed (step 006SHS145; NO), this flow chart ends.

Following step 006SHS145 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern "PBP-E" (step 006SHS146). Then, this flowchart ends.

(Production determination process B (determination of setting suggestion production)
10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process B executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-15 to 10-17 and the effect determination process B described in FIG. 10-18, which one is executed first in the variable display start setting process (S171)? You may

In the effect determination process B shown in FIG. 10-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hot character effect based on the current set value and the variation pattern (step 006SHS200). For example, when the current set value is one of 1 to 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is non-reach (variation pattern #10, # 11), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 1%, and the variation pattern is super reach A If it is out (variation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if the variation pattern is super reach B deviation (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern If is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%. If the pattern is a super reach B jackpot (fluctuation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is 6, as shown in FIG. If so, execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern is out of super reach A (variation pattern # If it is 13), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the variation pattern is not super reach B (variation pattern # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation If it is pattern #16), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the variation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (variation pattern #17), execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the variation pattern is super reach B. If it is a big hit (fluctuation pattern #18), execution is determined at a rate of 70%.

Following step 006SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the hot character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201). If it is determined that the hot character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS203. If it is not determined that the hot character effect should be executed (step 006SHS201; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS210.

Following step 006SHS201 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting suggestive effect pattern "SEP-ATU" for hot character effect (step 006SHS203).

Following step 006SHS201 (NO) or step 006SHS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-catching effect based on the variation pattern (step 006SHS210). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 100% if the variation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13, # 14). If it is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

After step 006SHS210, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006SHS211). If it is determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006SHS211; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS212. If it is not determined that the eye-catching effect should be executed (step 006 SHS211; NO), this flow chart ends.

Following step 006SHS211 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of eye-catching effect (that is, setting-suggesting effect pattern) based on the current set value and the variation pattern (step 006SHS212). For example, when the current set value is one of 1 to 3, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. If so, the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 10%. However, if the variation pattern is out of super reach B (variation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 95%, and the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP- EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)” is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any one of 4 to 6, as shown in FIG. If so, the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion production pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching production)" is determined at a rate of 40%. However, if the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern #14), the setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)” is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestive effect pattern “SEP- EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)” is determined at a rate of 40%.

Following step 006SHS212, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern (setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" or setting suggesting effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") of the eye-catching effect determined in step 006SHS212. (Step 006 SHS213).

FIGS. 10-19 to 10-22 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-19 to 10-22 show examples of main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 10-12(B), and FIG. 10-19 (B) → Figure 10-19 (C) → Figure 10-20 (A) → Figure 10-20 (B) → Figure 10-20 (C) → Figure 10-21 (A) → Figure 10- 21(B)→FIG. 10-21(C)→FIG. 10-22(A)→FIG. 10-22(B)→FIG. 10-22(C). Note that FIG. 10-19A (the same applies to other figures; reference numerals are omitted in other figures) shows an active display area 006SHAHA, which is a display area for active display, an active display 006SHAH displayed in the active display area 006SHAHA, is displayed.

FIG. 10-19(A) shows the scene before reaching reach in the variable display. FIG. 10-19(B) is a scene (scene of T1 in FIG. 10-12(B)) in which two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. Note that the two present box images 006SHPB-CL displayed are not distinguished from each other in terms of display mode, but are presents of the present box effect (PBP-B) intended for execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). The box image 006SHPB-CL is the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E). FIG. 10-19(C) shows a scene of reach in the variable display.

FIG. 10-20(A) shows a scene where the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is being performed, that is, a scene where the strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed (T4 in FIG. 10-12(B) ~ Scene of T5).

FIG. 10-20(B) is a scene (scene T6 in FIG. 10-12(B)) in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 10-20(B), the item corresponding to the group notice effect corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box). An image (an item image labeled "Group") is displayed.

FIG. 10-20(C) shows a scene in which the group preview effect (YEP-B) is being performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 006SHYKE-GN is displayed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 10-12(B). scene). Note that the gift box image 006SHPB-OP (the same applies to the item image corresponding to the group announcement effect) is erased before the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed (for example, immediately before T7). Also, the timing of erasing the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image to be erased when a certain notice effect is executed may not be before the execution of the notice effect (for example, the execution start timing of the notice effect, the notice effect (It may be any timing during the execution of, the end timing of the execution of the notice effect, etc.).

FIG. 10-21(A) shows a scene (scene T9 in FIG. 10-12(B)) in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 10-21(A), the present box image 006SHPB-CL corresponds to the present box image 006SHPB-OP changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the pseudo consecutive notice effect. An item image (an item image labeled "again") is displayed.

FIGS. 10-21(B) to 10-22(B) show scenes (scenes of T10 to T13 in FIG. 10-12(B)) in which the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is performed. Also, FIG. 10-21(C) shows a scene (T11-T12 scene in FIG. 10-12(B)) in which the hot character effect (SEP-ATU) is performed. FIG. 10-22(C) shows a scene in which a big win pattern is displayed.

The temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is displayed in FIGS. 10-21(B) to 10-22(A), and the re-variable display is performed in FIG. 10-22(B). In addition to the temporary stop pattern 006SH-REP, the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is also displayed in FIG. 10-21(C). is displayed. In other words, the hot character effect is executed with priority over the pseudo consecutive notice effect. Note that FIGS. 10-21(B) to 10-22(B) show an example in which “temporary stop→revariable display” is performed once as the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). As the advance notice effect (YEP-E), "temporary stop→re-variable display" may be performed twice or more.

FIGS. 10-23 to 10-25 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-23 to 10-25 show examples of some scenes in the example shown in FIG. 10-13. 23 (B) → Figure 10-23 (C) → Figure 10-24 (A) → Figure 10-24 (B) → Figure 10-24 (C) → Figure 10-25 (A) → Figure 10-25 ( B)→Transition in the order of FIG. 10-25(C).

FIG. 10-23(A) shows the scene immediately before developing into super reach (super reach B) (the scene immediately before T14 in FIG. 10-13). In the variable display (the variable display shown in FIGS. 10-13), two present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box effects (PBP -C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect (YEP-E)) is displayed, but FIG. In the scene of -23 (A) (the scene immediately before T14), the execution of the simulated consecutive notice effect (YEP-E) has already ended (in the scenes of T10 to T13), so one gift box image 006SHPB is displayed. -CL (present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) intended for execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C)) is displayed.

FIG. 10-23(B) shows a scene developed into super reach (the scene of T14 in FIG. 10-13).

FIG. 10-23(C) is a scene (scene of T15 in FIG. 10-13) in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 10-23(C), an item corresponding to the button notice effect corresponding to the present box image 006SHPB-CL changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box). An image (item image with a button image drawn) is displayed.

FIGS. 10-24(A) and 10-24(B) are scenes (scenes from T16 to T17 in FIG. 10-13) in which the button announcement effect (YEP-C1) is performed. In FIG. 10-24(A), a button image 006SHYKE-BU is displayed, and by pressing the button, a weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in FIG. 10-24(A).

FIG. 10-24(C) is a scene (scene just before Ta21 in FIG. 10-13) immediately before a losing symbol is displayed in super reach (super reach B). FIGS. 10-25(A) and 10-25(B) are scenes (scenes of Ta21 to Ta22 in FIG. 10-13) in which the winning symbols are displayed. In FIG. 10-25(A), a small pattern "767" is displayed, and in FIG. 10-25(B), a decorative pattern "767" is displayed.

FIG. 10-25(C) is a scene (Ta22-Ta23 scene in FIG. 10-13) in which the special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) is performed. In FIG. 10-25(C), an eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (a character image of a yukata with a goldfish pattern), which is a special mode, is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25(C), while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same is true while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 (not shown) is being displayed), the small pattern "767" is visible. It's becoming In addition, the "" shown in the four corners of each number "7", "6", and "7" of the small pattern "767" in Fig. 10-25 (C) indicates that the small pattern "767" is shaking. It is what I did. Incidentally, instead of or in addition to the small pattern "767" in FIG. 10-25(C), the small pattern "767" in FIG. 10-25(A) may also sway.

It should be noted that during the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (the same applies during the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the reach-compatible small patterns (such as the above shaking small pattern "767") are A small pattern (a small pattern that is stopped and displayed by a pattern confirmation command) may be visible at all times.

In addition, while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (similarly during the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the active display 006SHAH, the pending display, the pending number display (the first corresponding to the first special game) The number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special game are indicated by numbers or the like) may be displayed.

FIGS. 10-26 and 10-27 are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation related to the characteristic portion 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 10-26 and 10-27 show an example of a part of the scene in the example shown in FIG. 10-14. 26(B)→FIG. 10-26(C)→FIG. 10-27(A)→FIG. 10-27(B)→FIG. 10-27(C).

FIG. 10-26(A) shows five gift box images 006SHPB-CL (gift box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-A) targeted for execution of cut-in notice effect (YEP-A), Present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of group notice effect (YEP-B), present box effect (PBP-) for execution of button notice effect (YEP-C) C) gift box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SHPB-CL for present box presentation (PBP-D) targeted for execution of character announcement presentation (YEP-D), pseudo continuous announcement presentation (YEP-E) This is the scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 10-14) in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL) of the present box effect (PBP-E) intended for the execution of is displayed.

FIG. 10-26(B) shows the final present box image 006SHPB-CL (present box image 006SHPB- for the present box effect (PBP-D) targeted for execution of the character preview effect (YEP-D). CL) is the scene just before changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene just before T18 in FIGS. 10-14).

FIG. 10-26(C) is a scene (scene of T18 in FIG. 10-14) in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. In the scene of FIG. 10-26(C), the present box image 006SHPB-CL corresponds to the present box image 006SHPB-OP changing to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the role announcement effect. An item image (item image in which the movable body 006SH32 is drawn) is displayed.

FIG. 10-27(A) shows a scene (scenes from T19 to T20 in FIG. 10-14) in which the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is performed. In FIG. 10-27(A), the movable body 006SH32 is in motion.

FIGS. 10-27 (B) and (C) are scenes (scenes of Tb21 to Tb22 in FIG. 10-14) in which the jackpot symbols are displayed. In FIG. 10-27(B), a small pattern "777" is displayed, and in FIG. 10-27(C), a decorative pattern "777" is displayed.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 006SH)
Next, a modified example of the game machine related to the characteristic portion 006SH will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above explanation, after the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (after the present box is opened), the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image are deleted. , one of the two may be erased, and the other may remain displayed without being erased. Also, both may be kept displayed without being erased.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image corresponding to one notice effect that is actually executed is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-20 ( In B), an item image corresponding to the group notice effect executed in FIG. You may display the item image corresponding to . For example, in FIG. 10-20(B), item images corresponding to the group announcement effect and the pseudo-continuous announcement effect (for example, the item image indicated as "group/re", etc.) may be displayed.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above explanation, an example was explained in which the item image was displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP Sometimes you don't have to show item images. If the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image will be displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed depending on when the game is not played.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed at a constant timing, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed at any one of a plurality of timings. Depending on the timing at which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be varied.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, when a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed, a plurality of the present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed together. Image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between when a plurality of coins are displayed collectively and when they are displayed one by one.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed (without any effect). An effect of displaying the gift box image 006SHPB-CL by magic or a trick, an effect of the character carrying the present box image 006SHPB-CL, etc.) may be executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed and when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect. Also, there may be times when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect and times when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed after the effect. For example, there may be times when the magic is successful and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, and times when the magic is unsuccessful and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, but it may be displayed at another position. For example, it may be displayed near the active display area 006SHAHA (see FIGS. 10-19) (for example, above the active display 006SHAH). If there are a plurality of them, they may be displayed side by side in the vicinity of the active display area 006SHAHA.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 006SH)
10-11, execution timings and the like of each advance notice effect have been described above, but FIGS. 10-11 are only examples, and each effect may be executed at other execution timings.

As an example of the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect will be explained. In the example of FIGS. The timing may be later than the execution start timing of the group announcement effect. Also, in the example of FIGS. 10-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is before development, but the cut-in notice effect execution start timing may be after development. Also, the cut-in announcement effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be varied according to the execution disclosure timing. In addition, in the example of FIGS. 10-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed only once at most (although there is only one execution start timing), but it may be executed two or more times (execution start There may be two or more timings).

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, the hot character effect will be explained. In the example of FIGS. It may be earlier than the execution start timing of the group announcement effect. Also, in the example of FIGS. 10 and 11, the execution start timing of the hot character is before development, but the execution start timing of the hot character may be after development. The hot character effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. In addition, in the example of FIGS. 10-11, the hot character effect can be executed only once at most (although there is only one execution start timing), but it may be possible to execute it twice or more (execution start timing may be at two or more locations).

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, when the hot character effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect overlap, the hot character effect is given priority over the pseudo consecutive notice effect ("Heat" is displayed on the front side, etc.) (Fig. 10-21). (C)), the relationship between the hot character effect and other forewarning effects (however, character object foretelling effects are excluded) may be the same. In other words, when the setting suggestion effect (heated character effect) and the notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect may be prioritized.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In relation to the ninth modification, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the shorter execution time may be preferentially executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the setting suggesting effect (hot character effect) is shorter than that of the setting suggesting effect (hot character effect) and the notice effect (pseudo consecutive notice effect, etc.) (see Fig. 10-11). ), and when the setting suggestive effect (hot character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice effect, etc.) overlap, the setting suggestive effect is given priority (see FIG. 10-21(C)). Also, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the lower appearance frequency may be preferentially executed. Note that the appearance frequency may be logical (calculated) or may be based on actual operating conditions (such as the current day).

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the setting value is any of 1 to 5, or the setting value is 6, and the hot character effect (see FIG. 10-9), Alternatively, the eye-catching effect (see FIGS. 10-10) suggesting that the setting value is any of 4 to 6 has been described as the setting value suggesting effect, but the suggestion target is not limited to the above. . For example, it suggests an odd setting (whether the setting is 1, 3, or 5) or an even setting (whether the setting is 2, 4, or 6). A setting suggestion effect may be executed. Also, for example, whether the setting is low (whether the set value is 1 or 2), medium setting (whether the set value is 3 or 4), or high setting (whether the set value is 5). or) may be executed.

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the suggestion target (hot character effect: "1 to 5" or "6", eye-catching effect: "1 to 3" or "4 to 6") was explained. The same different setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, in a certain variation (for example, super reach B (variation patterns #14, #18), when only production A is executed and only production B (jackpot reliability is the same as production A) is executed and production There are cases where neither A nor effect B is executed. %), and when the set value is 6, the normal mode effect A is executed at a rate of 25% (special mode effect A is 75%), and the effect B is executed at a rate of 25%. As the effect mode of the effect B, in the case of the set value 1, the normal mode effect A is executed at a rate of 99% (the special mode effect A is 0.1%), and in the case of the set value 6, the normal mode effect is executed. Effect A may be executed at a rate of 1% (special aspect effect A is 99.9%) According to the above, both effect A and effect B have the same suggestion target ("1 to 5 or "6"), but the reliability of the set value suggestion (for example, the suggestion that the set value is "6") differs between the effects A and B. That is, the normal mode effect A is executed, the special mode effect A is executed, the normal mode effect B is executed, and the special mode effect B is executed. The reliability (accuracy of suggestion) that the set value is 6 is higher when the mode effect B is executed than when the special mode effect A is executed.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above description, the setting value suggesting effect suggests the current setting value, but it may also indicate whether or not the setting value is to be changed. A hot character effect (or an eye-catching effect) may suggest whether or not the setting value is to be changed, or a setting suggesting effect different from the hot character effect or the eye-catching effect suggests whether or not the setting value is to be changed. You may make it

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the action of the player is not involved when the set value suggesting effect is executed, but the action of the player may be involved when the set value suggesting effect is executed. As an example, a promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action (button operation, screen touch, operation of a model (lever, sword, gun, etc.) provided on the outer frame, etc.) within a predetermined period before the start of execution of the hot character effect. may be executed, and if there is an action of the player within the predetermined period, the hot character effect may be executed (if there is no action of the player within the predetermined period, the hot character effect is always performed It may not be executed, or may be set so that there are cases where the hot character effect is executed and cases where it is not executed).

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the eye-catching effect was explained as the setting suggestion effect that is executed when the hit is lost without being executed when the big hit occurs. is not limited to eye-catching production. For example, in a scene where a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in a battle super reach (for example, the scene in FIG. A set value may be suggested according to the type of the spoken line, etc., by executing the effect of the spoken line. For example, when the setting value is any one of 1 to 3, 65% of dialogue A and 35% of dialogue B are determined as the dialogue of the enemy character. As a character's dialogue, the dialogue A may be determined at a rate of 35% and the dialogue B at a determination ratio of 65%. For example, if the set value is one of 1 to 3, no dialogue is determined by 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character is 30%, and the dialogue of the ally character is determined by 10%. If the above is the case, the determination ratio may be 60% for no dialogue, 10% for enemy character dialogue, and 30% for ally character dialogue.

It should be noted that the scene where the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the scene of FIG. 10-25(A), etc.) is changed to the scene where the friendly character wins against the enemy character (for example, the scene of FIG. 10-27(B), etc.). If there is a possibility that a transitional reversal effect will be executed, the dialogue effect as described above may not be executed in a scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Alternatively, after the execution of the reverse effect is completely denied (timing after the timing of executing the reverse effect), the dialogue effect as described above may be executed.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effect (eye-catching effect) that is executed when the hit is not performed when the hit is a big hit, and the setting suggestion effect (hot character However, it is also possible to provide a setting suggestive effect which is not executed when the game is lost but is executed when the game is a big hit. For example, it is possible to execute a big win determination notification performance for notifying a big win during variable display, there are a plurality of types of performance modes of the big win determination notification performance, and a set value (or setting change) is suggested in a special mode. You may do so.

As an example, it is possible to execute a determination notification effect in which the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow color light during the variable display, and when it is in a normal light emission mode (for example, blinking at a normal speed), it notifies the confirmation of the big win and emits special light. When it is in a mode (for example, flashing of a special speed), it may be possible to notify the decision of a big hit and suggest a setting value (or setting change). As another example, it is possible to execute a fixed notification effect (full rotation effect) that rotates the decorative pattern with the numbers aligned during the variable display, and a normal effect mode (for example, full rotation in the forward direction from top to bottom) When it is , it informs the confirmation of the big hit, and when it is a special performance mode (for example, full rotation in the reverse direction from the bottom to the top), it informs the confirmation of the big hit and suggests a set value (or setting change). can be

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, as the notice effects, cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), group notice effects (YEP-B), button notice effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), character object notice effects (YEP- D), the example of executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) has been described, but the notice effect is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to execute advance notice effects as shown in FIGS. 10-2(D), (E) and (F). In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-2D, 10-2E, and 10-2F, during the reach, the background image is rendered as if it were broken like glass, which develops into super reach.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, for example, when executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A), the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect is performed. Although an example of executing the present box effect for the execution of the foretelling effect has been described, other effects may be executed for the execution of the foretelling effect when the foretelling effect is to be executed. For example, in the case of executing the advance notice effect, the timer effect may be executed in place of or in addition to the present box effect, targeting the execution of the advance notice effect.

For example, a timer image showing the remaining time (see, for example, FIG. 10-5 (C)) is displayed, the remaining time is gradually decreased, and a timer image with zero remaining time (for example, FIG. 10-5 (D) )) is displayed, the item image may be displayed (or the item image may not be displayed), and any advance notice effect may be executed. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed and when the timer image is displayed.

Also, the present box image and the timer image may be displayed at the same time. For example, when executing a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and a group notice effect (YEP), two present box images are displayed (a present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a group notice effect). When a gift box image corresponding to the effect is displayed), or when two timer images are displayed (a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed) case), or when one present box image and one timer image are displayed (when the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed, There may be a case where a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a present box image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed. In the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation for a big win may be varied between when the present box image and the timer image are displayed simultaneously and when they are not displayed simultaneously.

Note that the timers in the timer images shown in FIGS. 10-5(C) and (D) are digital timers (timers that display the remaining time by numerical values), but needle-type timers (the remaining time is displayed by the position of the needle, etc.). timer) may be used. Also, the timer may not be used as long as it indicates the remaining time (for example, an hourglass or the like may be used). The degree of expectation of a big win may be varied depending on which type (digital timer, needle timer, hourglass, etc.) is displayed.

When a plurality of timer images are displayed, they may be displayed side by side (for example, see FIG. 10-5 (E)), or the number may be displayed without arranging (for example, FIG. 10-5 (F)). )reference). The number of present box images may also be displayed without arranging them.

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above embodiment, the set value is suggested by the hot character effect or the eye-catching effect, but the setting value is not limited to the hot character effect or the eye-catching effect.

As an example, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in an effect (for example, a mini character effect, etc.) that is performed in a period such as before the reach or the period before the pseudo continuous temporary stop. The present box effect or the like may not be executed for the setting suggestion effect (that is, the execution of the mini character effect or the like should be prevented from being suggested by opening the present box).

As another example, the setting value may be suggested by present box presentation. Specifically, for example, in the present box rendering, in addition to the present box image in the normal mode (see FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B)), the present box image in the special mode (for example, FIG. 10-5 (G)) (H)) can be displayed, the present box image in the normal mode suggests execution of any advance notice effect, the present box image in special mode suggests execution of any notice effect, and the set value (or , setting change) may be suggested. The present box image 006SHPB2-CL in FIG. 10-5(G) differs from the present box image 006SHPB-CL in FIG. 10-5(A) in display mode (in this example, pattern). The present box image 006SHPB2-OP in FIG. 10-5(H) differs from the present box image 006SHPB-CL in FIG. 10-5(B) in display mode (pattern in this example).

As another example, a set value may be suggested by a timer effect. Specifically, for example, in the timer effect, in addition to the timer image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 10-5 (C) and (D)), the timer image of the special mode (for example, FIG. 10-5 (I) (J) ) can be displayed, the timer image of the normal mode suggests execution of any of the advance notice effects, and the timer image of the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effects, and the set value (or setting change) can be displayed. You may suggest. Note that the timer image in FIG. 10-5(I) differs from the timer image in FIG. 10-5(C) in display mode (in this example, the presence or absence of a bell). The timer image in FIG. 10-5(J) differs from the timer image in FIG. 10-5(D) in display mode (in this example, the presence or absence of a bell).

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 006SH)
In the above, the present box image (present box effect) is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7, 10-16, and 10-17), but the pre-reading notice setting process ( The present box image may be determined in step S161). In the mode in which the present box image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the present box image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the variation pattern (see FIG. 10-7). When determining the present box image in the reading notice setting process (step S161), based on the contents of the received pattern designation command (see FIG. 8-16) and variation category designation command (see FIG. 8-16), A decision may be made about the present box image. A plurality of present box images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one present box image may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start prize. good too. That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of present box images, or each variation may be associated with one present box image.

It should be noted that "suggestion of set value" only makes the user recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range), and that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). may not be definitely reported, and a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range) may be definitely reported. For example, for a certain effect or a certain display, etc., by not deciding when it is a low setting (for example, set value 3 or less), the effect or display etc. can be set at high setting (for example, set value 4 or less) It will definitely notify you of something.

In the above description, since the variation pattern includes the display result (loss, big hit) (for example, variation pattern # 13 includes the fact that Super Reach A is executed and the variation pattern # 17 includes a big hit in addition to the execution of Super Reach A), use the variation pattern (contents of the variation pattern designation command) without using the display result (contents of the variable display result notification command, etc.) By doing so, various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) are determined (for example, FIGS. 10-3, 10-4, 10-7, 10-9, and 10- 10), and display results (contents of variable display result notification commands, etc.) may be used to determine various effects (announcement effects, present box effects, setting suggestion effects, etc.).

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not in an advantageous state), periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), it is determined whether to transition to another state (for example, an advantageous state) than normal. In a slot machine that draws lots with a high probability, multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations of transition to other states and specific displays (gift box images, timer images, etc.) corresponding to the notice effects to be executed are displayed. making the specific performance to be displayed executable, executable when the setting suggestive performance is not controlled to another state (advantageous state), and displaying the specific display corresponding to the previous notice performance before the performance of the previous notice; There are cases where the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display is performed before the advance notice effect is executed. is changed to a special mode, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. When the ratio of control to another state (advantageous state) is high and the setting suggesting effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggesting effect.

Alternatively, in a slot machine that draws with a high probability whether a first advantageous state (e.g., CZ, bonus game, etc.) transitions to a second advantageous state (e.g., AT state, ART state, etc.), the first In an advantageous state, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different expectations of transition to the second advantageous state, and specific effects that display specific displays (gift box image, timer image, etc.) corresponding to the advance notice effect. and can be executed when the setting suggestive effect is not controlled to the second advantageous state, and when a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and when the advance notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. There are times when the specific display corresponding to is not displayed, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, it is in a second advantageous state than when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. When the control ratio is high and the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 006SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic part 006SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and a player's preference than the disadvantageous set value. a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value having a high degree of advantage for the player; , The effect execution means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effects, group notice effects, etc. shown in FIG. 10-1) and specific displays corresponding to the notice effects (for example, FIG. 10-5, a present box image, a timer image, etc.) can be executed, and a setting suggestive effect related to the setting means (for example, a special eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 10-8(A) effect, etc.) can be executed when not being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, it can be executed during Ta22 to Ta23 as shown in FIG. 10-11), and before the execution of the notice effect, it corresponds to the notice effect. There are times when the specific display is displayed and times when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether the present box effect shown in FIG. 10-7 is executed or not is determined). determination ratio), and when displaying the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-6, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. , the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether or not the present box effect is executed as shown in FIG. 10-7). determination ratio), and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display is not displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11, cut-in notice effect, group notice Presentations, pseudo-continuous notice effects, button notice effects, and character notice effects are subject to gift boxes, but hot character effects and eye-catching effects are not subject to present boxes).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. In other words, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player guesses that the setting suggestion effect will not control to an advantageous state, and the player's sense of expectation is reduced and the interest in the game is lost. However, in the gaming machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as a target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the means 1 is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state and is executable when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 10-10) etc.), and a second setting suggestion effect (for example, hot character effect shown in FIG. 10-9, etc.) that can be executed either when it is controlled to the advantageous state or when it is not controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible.

According to the gaming machine described above, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the game machine of the means 1 is not executed when the control is not in the advantageous state, but is executed when the control is in the advantageous state. production, etc.) may be executable.

(Means 3 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 or 2 has a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects (for example, hot character effects shown in FIG. 10-9, eye-catching directing, etc.) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different suggestion accuracies, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 4 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 3 is capable of executing variable display of identification information, and comprises prefetch determination means for prefetching whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, wherein the specific display is based on the prefetch determination. (For example, display of the present box image may be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161)).

According to the gaming machine, based on the look-ahead determination, the specific display can be displayed, for example, before the change starts, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 4 can display a plurality of the specific displays (see, for example, FIGS. is more likely to be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state than the singular.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display number of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
In the game machine of the means 1 to 5, there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 10-5), and the display mode of the specific display may suggest the setting means. .

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the specific display, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

(Means 7 related to characteristic portion 006SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 6 has a period of execution of the notice effect (for example, a period of execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect of FIG. 10-11) and a period of execution of the setting suggestion effect (for example, , etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (C), “heat” is changed to “ Re” is displayed on the front side).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being overlooked.

(Means 8 related to characteristic part 006SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 7, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are made independently of each other. For example, execution or non-execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the effect determination process B (see FIG. 10-18), and execution or non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined by the effect determination process A (see FIGS. 10-15 to 10-17). be done.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to suitably execute the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect. Also, the design becomes easier.

(Means 9 related to characteristic part 006SH)
The game machine of means 1 to 8 may be capable of executing variable display of the identification information, and may be capable of executing the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the amusement of the game. In addition, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain a feeling of anticipation as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 006SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 10SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like, as described above.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 10SH includes vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. Details will be described later.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. Details will be described later.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed. Details will be described later.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T2 when the reach is established, and the normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration performance can be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance and the timing T4 during execution of the super ready-to-win performance. Details will be described later.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B regardless of whether it is timing T1 or timing T2 or timing T3 or timing T4. Vibration production can be executed in a mode in which the vibration time and the luminescent color are common. Details will be described later.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Details will be described later.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4. Details will be described later.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. Details will be described later.

The game machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach as described above.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. Details will be described later.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 for displaying various effect images, as described above.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. As shown in FIG. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. In addition, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. A plurality of LEDs are built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L and 9R. The lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. It should be noted that the lighting/extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a motor control board 130, for example. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. The display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131 in this way. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). A variation pattern and a display result are transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display and specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Lottery here refers to a determination method based on random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 . As the random number value, one of random numbers for effect updated by the random number circuit 124 or random number update process for effect is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed, based on a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the vibration performance is not executed, and when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win depends on the execution pattern of the vibration performance. is different, the determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when the vibration performance is executed.

Here, the reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (the probability that the effect A will be executed when the display result is a “big hit”)×(the probability that the display result will be a “big hit”)/{(display result Probability that production A will be executed when is a "jackpot") x (Probability that the display result will be a "jackpot") + (Probability that production A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is displayed when the display result is "big win" so that the reliability of the big win corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It is sufficient if the probability of execution and the probability of execution of the vibration effect of each execution pattern when the display result is not a "big win" are defined.

(Details of vibration production and reliability of jackpot)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, according to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, executes patterns SE1 to A plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, when executing the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is, after the timing T1 and the timing T2, the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach. Vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win when executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of normal reach when executing the vibration performance at timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration production of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration production at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

According to such a configuration, since the vibrating effect may be executed while the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being executed, it is possible to improve the amusement.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, or the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed. , irrespective of whether it is the timing T4 or not, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B and a vibrating effect in which the is illuminated in red. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. is. In addition, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be executed. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration production of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and vibrates for 3 seconds more than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed in which the push button 31B emits red light. Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of the vibrating effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". to be reported deterministically.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, attention can be paid to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and is pushed When the vibration effect of making the button 31B emit red light is executed, the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same mode, it is better to execute it at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started than when it is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach. Highly reliable. Further, even if the vibration effect of the same mode is executed, it is executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, rather than at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. , The reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, when the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win is performed instead of the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach at the time T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration presentation at timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibrating performance is not actually executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach is heightened. be able to.

Incidentally, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach should be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win productions of normal reach, and if the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win production of normal reach, the reliability of the big hit of vibration production that can be executed at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach is , it may be higher than the hit reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach executed at that time, or higher than the hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the normal reach.

Similarly, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super-reach should be higher than the reliability of the super-ready-to-win. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, and when the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the big hit of vibrating performance to be executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The reliability should be higher than the big win reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win being executed at that time, or higher than the big-hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win can be regarded as the chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Then, it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, when the vibration performance is actually not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established can be further heightened.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to intricately change the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern progresses.

In addition, the probability of executing the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low compared to the probability of executing the vibration effect of other modes. By stipulating, it is possible to heighten interest when it is definitely reported that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and increase the chances of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach in this variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at the timing T4 during execution or at any one of the timings (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach (step 10SHS3; Yes), effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is a effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same rate regardless of which mode the current vibration effect is.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In addition, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration performance is executed at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative patterns is started or timing T2 when ready-to-win is established, visual guidance performance is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the true display result may be derived and displayed after the display result of "missing" is displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the current variable display is started, when the visual guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, There is a possibility of causing a misunderstanding as if a relief effect was being executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

Also, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of decorative symbols has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to properly recognize that the state of variable display of the decoration pattern has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. .

Returning to the description of FIG. 11-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach ( Step 10SHS3; No) or after executing the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not other effects such as ready-to-win effects are to be executed, and the mode of the effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are to be executed and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by varying the decision ratio in the lottery according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the reliability of the big win can be varied according to the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice performance or the like and its mode. Also, when the current pattern designates reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect designated by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to this fluctuation pattern as an initial value to the production control process timer, and the type and mode of production determined to be executed. is stored in a timer value storage area of RAM 122 in association with an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the production by comparison with the timer value of the production control process timer. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies to the display control unit 123 an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols leading to the mode specified by the current variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decoration pattern. At this time, the display corresponding to the variable display may be updated.

Thereafter, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and gaze guidance production)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing an example of execution timings and presentation periods of the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the visual guidance effect before that.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the visual guidance performance four seconds before the timing T3 when executing the visual guidance performance before executing the vibration performance at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach. , the vibration performance is started when the timing T3 comes. Similarly, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of the super reach. Performance is started, and vibration performance is started when timing T4 comes. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the visual guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this production operation example, an example of executing the vibration production at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is started, the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the decoration pattern that was stop-displayed when the ready-to-win was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the "left" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5L is obtained by reducing the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L when the ready-to-win is established. , and a "right" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5R that is reduced from the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established.

A small pattern display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, variable display of small patterns is performed in synchronization with variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. derived.

In this manner, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decoration pattern is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the derivation of the fixed decoration pattern as the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small pattern disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small patterns that are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK are also called constant small patterns or small patterns for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, in a display mode that is partially or wholly common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that indicates a number in the same manner as a part that indicates a number in the decorative pattern, a plurality of identifiable An effect image showing the type of small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image. It should be noted that the small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display of the small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. may be displayed in the lower left corner of the

In addition, a special pattern, a decorative pattern, and a fourth pattern next to the normal pattern are provided, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern. The variable display of the fourth pattern is, for example, in a fourth pattern display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, and repeats display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, the display result of the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize when compared with the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol.

Also, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, as shown in FIG. are placed at a distance. Therefore, the player who pays attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to confirm the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbols progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. On the other hand, small patterns are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and by deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether the variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In this example, a suspended display area 10SHH for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , is displayed. Incidentally, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the reservation display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

A pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the reserved display area 10SHH, the reserved number of variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed so as to be identifiable. The display mode is a mode displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect four seconds before the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes, as the line-of-sight guidance effect, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect, for example.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B). do.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-6(D). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 changes the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 11-7(E) and (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the hammer swung down by the character to collide with the button image 10SHB at timing T4, and the button image 10SHB produces a plurality of stars imitating the button image 10SHB. The various images are changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect at the timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect, as shown in FIG. 11-7(H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B by the vibration effect has passed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position apart from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the display effect on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B. It can be difficult to recognize whether On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

In addition, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small patterns and the display of the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is always displayed on the back side of the small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , always has a lower priority than the small pattern.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the display of the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the induction effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the visual guidance effect display is set higher than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the front side of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-7(G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are displays for the visual guidance effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(D), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area 10SHH, and the line of sight guidance effect It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the reserved display.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line of sight guidance effect is displayed. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while always suitably ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. Also, the display of small patterns and the number of pending items, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations more preferably. .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

(Modification 1)
In the above embodiment, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. I explained some examples. Instead of such a configuration, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect may be set according to which mode of vibration effect is to be executed. .

In Modified Example 1, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set to the ratio shown in FIG. 11-8. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds. and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or the vibration presentation is such that the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. to determine whether or not the line-of-sight guidance effect is to be performed. Here, when the vibrating effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect. Also, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution ratio of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect with the higher reliability of the big win by executing the visual guidance effect.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect has been described. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big hit according to the modification 2. FIG. The effect control CPU 120 of the embodiment according to Modification 2 provides, as vibration effects interlocked with the forenotice effect, the interlocking foreshadowing effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. , and a plurality of types of vibration effects of the execution patterns SE11 to SE14 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a character product announcement effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE11 interlocked with the highly reliable character product announcement effect. The vibration effect of the execution pattern SE11 is a effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the movement of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. Incidentally, it is sufficient that the reliability of the big hit of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE11 is higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking character product announcement effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE11 can be used as a chance-up effect in the character object announcement effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE12 interlocked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. The vibration effect of the execution pattern SE12 is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronism with the image displayed in the advance notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. It should be noted that the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE12 should be higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking advance notice performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE12 can be a chance-up effect in the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the finalized decoration pattern that becomes the jackpot combination is derived, the game balls pass through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning opening. By doing so, a big hit game state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect for notifying the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE13 and SE14 interlocked with the round lottery effect. The vibration performance of the execution pattern SE13 is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, which is a jackpot game state. Notifies that the upper limit number of rounds executed in is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. The vibration performance of the execution pattern SE14 is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance. To definitely notify that the upper limit number of rounds executed in a state is the maximum number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

(Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying the occurrence of an error is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect should have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably ensure the visibility of the error notification image even when the visual guidance effect is being executed when the error notification image is displayed.

(Modification 4)
In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is uniquely determined corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. Instead of such a configuration, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the visual guidance effect is executed and when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. You can improve your interest when you play. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , it is easy for the user to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, it is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started before the timing T2 at which the reach is established, or the reach of the normal reach at the timing after the timing T2 at which the reach is established. An example in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is common regardless of whether it is the timing T3 during execution of the effect or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach has been described. Instead of such a configuration, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set at a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing, with reference to a certain timing. It can be different. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, which is the timing before the timing T2, based on the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , 3 seconds at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, which is the timing after timing T2. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing should be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

(Modification 6)
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation differs according to the combination of the vibration time and the light emission mode of the push button 31B. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation may differ according to the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and when it is vibrated with a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation should be made higher than that when vibrating the push button 31B with the first strength. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

(Modification 7)
The execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration presentation in the above embodiment may be common between the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort.

(Modification 8)
In the above-described embodiment, the example of executing the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed has been described. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, a vibration performance may be executed as a pre-reading forewarning performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the vibration effect.

(Modification 9)
When the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect as in the modification 8, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode, The big hit reliability in the variable display before the execution to be the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipatory notice effect is a mode in which the vibration continues for a predetermined period of time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, Reliability levels of big wins are made different in variable display before execution to be the target of pre-reading notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect.

(Modification 10)
When the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect as in the modified example 8, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed as the notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. may be executable only at one of a plurality of timings. For example, the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration performance as the foreseeing notice can be executed, the vibration performance is the foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. has been executed.

(Modification 11)
When the vibration performance is executed as the pre-reading notice performance at the timing at which the vibration performance as the advance notice performance for notifying the jackpot reliability in the running variable display can be executed as in the modification 10, the jackpot reliability in the running variable display. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for predicting the degree may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect. For example, when it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. is 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B is 1.5 seconds in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the notice performance for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution is set to vibrate continuously for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the look-ahead notice performance. The vibration mode of is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, at the timing at which the vibration production as the advance notice production for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed can be executed, when the vibration production as the foreseeing advance notice production can be executed, any It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the vibration presentation has been executed.

(Modification 12)
As in Modified Example 7, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big hit, it is specified Regarding the vibration performance executed at the timing, the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model are different. However, the jackpot reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the reliability of the big win is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the execution of the vibration performance at the specific timing.

(Modification 13)
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation is uniquely determined for each execution pattern. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be set, for example, when the visual guidance effect is not executed, the image of the effect executed at that time. may be adjusted to match the For example, when a notification performance for notifying that a ready-to-win state has been established is executed at timing T2 when the ready-to-win state has been established, vibration performance is performed by vibrating the push button 31B during the period in which the video of the informing state is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 14)
As in Modification 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model are the same when the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance are made common. Regarding the vibration effect of the execution pattern, only the lower limit of the reliability of the big win may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration performance is executed as a chance-up performance of another performance, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance can be flexibly set in relation to the reliability of the big win of the other performance. While adjusting, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

(Modification 15)
In the above-described embodiment, the vibration effect is performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, the timing T3 when the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach is being executed, and the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win is executed. An example that can be executed has been described at timing T4 in . Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be executed at timings different from the timings T1 to T4.

For example, the CPU 120 for performance control temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination which is not a big-win combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and then the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win mode. It is possible to execute an incendiary production to incite the development to the reach mode. After the fanning performance is executed, there are a case where the ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win is developed and a case where the display result becomes "lost" without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win. In the case of developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a success performance for informing that the ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win is developed as a result of the performance of the performance of inciting performance. On the other hand, when the display result becomes ``lost'' without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the ready-to-reach state with high reliability of big win is not developed as a result of the performance of the fanning performance. Execute the instigation failure performance. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

Then, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the successful fanning effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

Then, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the swaying success performance is the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of a plurality of types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the vibrating effect of (1) may be made to emit light in the same color as the light emitting color. According to such a configuration, when the inciting success effect is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be "lost" even if it develops into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of the big win, but the reliability of the big win is excessively increased. You can prevent it from rising.

In addition, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the amusement at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to heighten expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. You can improve your interest when you play.

(Modification 16)
As in the modification 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model, when making the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance common, the game Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot types with different degrees of advantage to players, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation is "rainbow color". to be possible. According to such a configuration, when the luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. can be

(Modification 17)
In the case of the configuration as in Modified Example 15, if there are only two kinds of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, the execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color" is not provided. You may do so. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in the "rainbow color" in the vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the "big win" of the big win type having a low advantage for the player. It is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation for the vibration performance from being spoiled.

(Modification 18)
In the above-described embodiment, an example of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using a visual effect has been described as the line-of-sight guidance effect. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the performance control CPU 120 uses an auditory performance effect as a visual direction guidance performance to guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. may For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration production is being executed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a small volume to a large volume as the visual guidance production. Output to change. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has difficulty in recognizing the line-of-sight guidance performance using the visual performance effect pay attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

(Modification 19)
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. It is good if there is The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "6" has the highest probability of winning, and "6", "5", "4", "3", "2", "1". The smaller the value, the lower the winning probability. That is, when "6" is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and the value decreases in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1". Benefits decrease step by step.

In this way, when the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, even if the vibration performance is the same execution pattern, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. Depending on when it is a value, the reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different. For example, even in the vibration performance of the same execution pattern, when the set value is "6", the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern should be higher than when the set value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

(Modification 20)
When the winning probability of the big win changes according to the setting value as in the modification 18, vibration production is performed when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is different from the first setting value. , the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the setting value by the vibration effect.

For example, when the set value is one of "1" to "3" and when the set value is one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the high setting, which may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, is set by the vibration effect.

Further, for example, the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation may be different between when the set value is an odd number and when the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not it is an even set value that may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous set value for the player, by the vibration effect.

(Modification 21)
In the above-described embodiment, as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when reach is established, only the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4, in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, is an example that can be executed. explained. Instead of such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. A vibrating effect in which the push button 31B is caused to vibrate and emit red light may be executed. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not only the execution of the vibration effect but also the mode when the vibration effect is executed can be noticed.

(Modification 22)
Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established as in the modified example 21, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds. In the case of making it possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the vibration is performed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. A rendition may be performed. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T2 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration performance is not executed, it is possible not only to heighten the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, but also to increase the attention to the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T2. .

(Modification 23)
In the above embodiment, the vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T4 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated in rainbow colors. Even if the performance is not executed, not only can the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win be enhanced, but also the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T4 can be more focused. can be enhanced.

(Modification 24)
In the above-described embodiment, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect in which the push button 31B, which definitely notifies that the display result is a "big hit", emits light in rainbow colors is set so that the display result is a "big hit". An example has been described in which the vibration time is the same as the vibration time in the mode of causing the push button 31B, which does not deterministically notify the user, to emit light in red. Instead of such a configuration, the vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating to deterministically notify that the display result is a "big hit" are determined to confirm that the display result is a "big hit". The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those in the vibration performance of the mode in which the notification is not actually made. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating the display result of a "big hit" is changed to the vibration time of the vibration mode of the mode not informing the display result of the "big hit". The vibration time is set to be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous in the mode of vibration performance that does not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit", it will definitely notify that the display result will be a "big hit". In the vibration effect of the mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the vibration effect in the form of deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

(Modification 25)
In the above embodiment, even if the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach, the visual guidance effect may not be executed. An example was described. Instead of such a configuration, when the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. good too. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect is favorably increased by favorably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

(Modification 26)
In the above-described embodiment, at one of the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, when the vibration effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed. The vibrating effect may be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. In that case, the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 are lower than the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is such that the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 does not fall below the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be restricted. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at time T3, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at time T4, limit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the big win reliability from being lowered when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

(Modification 27)
When the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance is executable as in the modified example 2, the mode of the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance and the mode of the vibration performance not interlocking with the foretelling performance may be different. For example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the music played in the interlocked advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character object announcement effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the effect sound when the character object moves. Further, for example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not interlocked with the advance notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to the advance notice performance or not linked to the notice performance. .

(Modification 28)
In the above-described embodiment, the present box presentation may be executed as in the characteristic portion 027SH and the characteristic portion 006SH. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the opened present box as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the visual guidance effect and the vibration effect due to the execution of the present box effect.

(Modification 29)
In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation presentation for operating the push button 31B. In the operation effect, the push button 31B may be illuminated in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid.

(Modification 30)
In the above embodiment, for example, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to set the volume of the effect to be executed, the music to be output or the background to be played. It is possible to change settings related to effects such as type setting, brightness setting of the image display device 5, brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It should be noted that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed corresponding to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lighted in order to notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation presentation such as the modification 30. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration effect in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2019-051075).

In general, a player plays a game while looking at display means on which variable displays and various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operation means is out of sight of the player, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize that the operation means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration presentation.

Therefore, in order to make the game means pay attention before the vibration effect is executed and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled by the player is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, etc.), and a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the player vibrates, etc.), and a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player's (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the advantageous state is controlled when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed), and the vibration performance executing means , at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing, the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern at the timing T1 and the second timing after the first timing). , a timing T2 at which the reach is established, a timing T3 after the timings T1 and T2, during which the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach is being executed, and a timing during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win. (e.g., at any one of T4 and T4, the vibration effect can be executed), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is performed in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is either timing T1 or T2, or either timing T3 or T4, regardless of (e.g., the vibrating effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and the light emitting color of the push button 31B are the same), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2) (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of the means 1, wherein the vibration effect execution means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, effect control For example, the CPU 120 may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , being able to execute a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the vibrating effect can be executed when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the game machines of means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5 that displays various effect images. and the like), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect image has lower priority than constant small patterns, pending number display, and various error notifications, and has higher priority than pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the vibration performance execution means is the vibration performance of the first mode and the advantageous state more than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. ), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, pachinko game In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white. At the same time, the vibration effect of making the push button 31B emit red light is easier to execute, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode by executing the visual guidance effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means;
with
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration effect execution means is
The vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and at a second timing after the first timing,
Regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common manner,
The line-of-sight guidance effect execution means includes:
without executing the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing,
The visual guidance effect can be started before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing,
The vibration effect can be started while the visual guidance effect is being executed ,
The vibration effect includes the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the vibration effect of the first mode,
When the visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images